Yamaha RX-V2500 de handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2004 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WD64260
RX-V2500
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER'S MANUAL
MODE D'EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
GB
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY 0027
MYRYAD 0108
NAD 0131
NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL 0253
NECKERMANN 0108
NESCO 0099
NEWAVE 0064
NIKKO 0064
NOBLEX 0267
NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE 0068, 0347
OCEANIC 0027, 0068
OKANO 0342, 0375
OLYMPUS 0062, 0253
OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND 0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX 0069
PERDIO 0027
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
PILOT 0064
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 0099
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMISHI 0099
YOKAN 0099
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
RX-V2500
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cable
from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit
in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from
the wall outlet.
18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
General model.............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
Special Instructions for U.K. Model
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the
standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
1
English
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 8
Front panel display .................................................... 9
Rear panel ................................................................ 11
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12
Speaker placement ................................................... 12
Speaker connections ................................................ 13
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17
Before connecting components................................ 17
Connecting video components................................. 18
Connecting audio components................................. 21
Connecting the antennas.......................................... 23
Connecting the power cable..................................... 24
Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25
Turning on the power............................................... 25
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26
Introduction.............................................................. 26
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26
Starting the setup ..................................................... 27
Confirming the results ............................................. 29
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32
Basic operations....................................................... 32
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 33
Additional operations............................................... 34
Selecting input modes.............................................. 39
TUNING ................................................................ 40
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 40
Presetting stations .................................................... 41
Selecting preset stations........................................... 43
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43
Receiving RDS stations ........................................... 44
Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 44
PTY SEEK function ................................................ 45
EON function........................................................... 46
RECORDING ....................................................... 47
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................48
For movie/video sources.......................................... 48
For music sources .................................................... 51
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................52
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 52
SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................53
Changing parameter settings ................................... 55
Input Select .............................................................. 56
Manual setup: Sound ............................................... 58
Manual setup: Basic................................................. 61
Manual setup: Option .............................................. 65
System Memory....................................................... 67
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................69
Control area ............................................................. 69
Setting remote control codes ................................... 70
Programming codes from other remote controls
(Learn) ................................................................. 72
Changing source names in the display window....... 74
Using the Macro feature .......................................... 75
Clearing function sets .............................................. 77
Clearing individual functions .................................. 78
Controlling each component.................................... 80
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND
AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY).....................81
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 81
Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 82
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................84
Advanced setup menu.............................................. 84
Front panel display system options menu................ 85
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......89
What is a sound field? ............................................. 89
Changing parameter settings ................................... 89
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................90
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................95
GLOSSARY.........................................................100
Audio formats ........................................................ 100
Sound field programs............................................. 101
Audio information ................................................. 102
Video signal information ....................................... 103
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER
INFORMATION .............................................104
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................105
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 )
Front: 130 W + 130 W
Center: 130 W
Surround: 130 W + 130 W
Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W
Sound field features
Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
THX Select
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,
DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
IIx decoder
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
40-station random access preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Other features
YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer for automatic speaker setup
192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to
optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video
system
6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi
channel input
Short message function
PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and
PCM sources
S-video signal input/output capability
Component video input/output capability
Video signal conversion (composite video
S-video component video) capability for monitor
out
Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
Sleep timer
Cinema and music night listening mode
Remote control with preset remote control codes and
learning/macro capability
Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models
only)
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd.
Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and
Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby
Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
FEATURES
GETTING STARTED
3
English
INTRODUCTION
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)
according to the polarity markings on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Notes on batteries
Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the
operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator
does not flash, or its light or display window become dim.
Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
EXIT
TOP
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Remote control Batteries (4)
(AAA, LR03)
AM loop antenna
Optimizer microphone
75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
Speaker terminal wrench
Power cable
Indoor FM antenna
(U.K., Europe and
Australia models)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Korea, Asia and General
models)
Installing batteries in the remote
controls
1
3
2
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you
turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 6
to 7 second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.
In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.
2 INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
3 PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when
turned on (see page 37).
4 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and tuning.
6 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO
indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off).
9 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
0 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
A SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
A
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH
B
INPUT MODE
INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
FM/AM
EDIT
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
MEMORY
PHONES
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET
/TUNING
TUNING
MODE
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
EFFECT
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR2
YPAO
1 24 0
ABC EF
DHI LKJ
3 9
PQRO
EON PTY SEEK
MODE START
RDS MODE
/FREQ
M N
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
6785
G
(U.K. and Europe models only)
(U.S.A. model)
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
English
INTRODUCTION
B MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input
selector buttons on the remote control).
C INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39).
D REC OUT/ZONE 2
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video
recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source
you are listening to or watching in the main room. When
set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is
directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the
source you record are always identical
REC OUT (other models)
Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video
recorder independent of the source you are listening to or
watching. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position,
the input source is directed to all outputs.
E OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see
page 26).
F A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).
G PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is
displayed next to the band indication in the front panel
display.
Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not
displayed.
H PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the front left and right channels.
I VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from an external source such
as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these
jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.
J ZONE ON/OFF (MAIN)
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
Turns the main unit on or to the standby mode (see
page 83).
K ZONE ON/OFF (ZONE 2)
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
Turns Zone 2 on or to the standby mode (see page 83).
L TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right
and center channels (see page 34).
M PROGRAM
Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble
balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).
N STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
U.K. and Europe models only
O RDS MODE/FREQ
Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station
to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY
mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS
data service) and/or the frequency display mode (see
page 44).
P EON
Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see
page 46).
Q PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode
(see page 45).
R PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode (see page 45).
Opening and closing the front panel
door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 69.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 Transmission indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected source component that
you can control.
5 PRESET +/–
Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner
mode.
6 LIGHT button
Press to light up remote control buttons and display
window.
7 A/B/C/D/E
Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode.
8 TOP
Selects the graphical user interface (GUI) mode for your
video monitor.
9 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER
Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI
menu items.
0 RETURN
Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel
display menu mode.
A Sound field program/Numeric buttons
Use to select sound field programs or input numbers.
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when
this unit is in tuner mode.
B MEMORY 1/2
Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO settings
or additional preset stations (see page 68).
C MACRO ON/OFF
Turns the macro function on and off.
D MACRO
Use to program a series of operations for control by a
single button (see page 75).
E STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
F SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
G INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39).
H SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
Remote control
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
1
2 B
THX
STANDARD SELECT
EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
D
E
F
H
K
L
M
N
O
J
I
P
Q
R
S
G
9
8
0
A
2
1
4
5
7
6
3
t
U
V
W
X
B
C
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
English
INTRODUCTION
I MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder (etc.).
J SELECT k / n
Selects another component that you can control
independently of the input component selected with the
input selector buttons.
K VOL +/
Increases or decreases the volume level.
L AMP/SOURCE/TV
Selects the component you want to control with the
remote control.
AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit.
SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component
selected with an input selector button.
TV: Set to this position to operate the television.
To set the remote control codes for components, see
page 70.
M MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
N PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37).
O EXIT
Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode.
P NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 37).
Q DISPLAY
Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode.
R STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
S EXTD. SUR
Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of
multi-channel software.
T SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
U RE-NAME
Used to change the input source name in the display
window (see page 74).
V CLEAR
Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn,
macro and rename features, or setting remote control
codes (see page 77).
W LEARN
Used to set up the remote control code or program
functions from other remote controls (see page 72).
U.K. and Europe models only
X RDS tuning buttons
(Available when this unit is in tuner mode)
FREQ/RDS
Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station
to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT
mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data
services) and/or the frequency display (see page 44).
EON
Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see
page 46).
PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode
(see page 45).
PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode (see page 45).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
Handling the remote control
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
high humidity such as near a bath
high temperature such as near a heater or stove
extremely low temperature
dusty places
Using the remote control
A
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH
B
INPUT MODE
INPUT
TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
EFFECT
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
PURE DIRECT
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE
/REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
FM/AM
EDIT
PHONES
S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
MEMORY
SILENT CINEMA
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET
/TUNING
TUNING
MODE
OPTIMIZER
MIC
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR
/VCR2
30 30
YPAO
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
English
INTRODUCTION
1 Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
2 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
3 NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
4 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
5 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
6 YPAO indicator
Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the
auto setup speaker settings are used without any
modifications.
7 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
8 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
9 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
0 THX indicator
Lights up when a THX program is selected.
A PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
B SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
C VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 38).
D Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
E SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected, or when bi-wiring.
F SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 34).
G Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
H HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
I MEMORY indicator
Blinks to show a station can be stored.
J TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
K MUTE indicator
Blinks while the MUTE function is on.
Front panel display
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
96
24
NIGHT
VIRTUAL
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE4
SLEEP
YPAO
HiFi DSP
STEREO
TUNED
EON
AUTO
MEMORY
MUTE
VOLUME
DIGITAL
PL
MATRIX
DISCRETE
PCM
THX
PL
EX
SILENT
CINEMA
A B
SP
LFE
ft
mS
dB
96/24
LL C R
SL SB SR
PL x
PS PTY RT CT
PTY
HOLD
dB
AFGHK
135678
BE
2
C
9
DIJ
PQ
LM
4
NO0
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and
Australia models only)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround/surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
L 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
M LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.
N Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of current digital input
signal.
O Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back
speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 26) or
Speaker Level setting (page 64).
P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on.
Q RDS indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up.
EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON
data service is being received.
PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the
PTY SEEK mode.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11
English
INTRODUCTION
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
See page 21 for details.
2 Antenna terminals
See page 23 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 18 and 20 for connection information.
4 Audio component jacks
See page 21 for connection information.
5 Speaker terminal wrench hook
Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use.
6 RS-232C terminal
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.
Consult you dealer for details.
7 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
See page 81 for details.
8 CONTROL OUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
These are control expansion terminals for commercial use.
9 AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see
page 24).
0 AC INLET
Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see
page 24).
A DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details.
B ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
See page 81 for details.
C MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 19 for connection information.
D PRE OUT jacks
See page 22 for connection information.
E Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
F PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
PRESENCE speaker terminals
(other models)
See page 13 for connection information.
Rear panel
GND
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK SINGLE
R
R
L
R
R
L
L
L
MONITOR
AUDIOVIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV
CBL/
SAT
VIDEO
IN
OUT
OUT
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
ZONE 2
R
L
IN
CENTERSUB WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUTOUTPUT
AUDIO
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
SURROUND
TUNER
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
COAXIAL
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
B
RS-232C
DVR/
VCR 2
CONTROL OUT
REMOTE
IN IN OUT
21
OUT
1
2
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
MONITOR
OUT
P
B
Y
DVD
DTVDTV
CBL/
SAT
+12V 15mA MAX.
PRESENCE/ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT (6 ch)/ SB (8 ch)
AC OUTLETS
AC IN
FRONT
SURROUND
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE
CENTER
R
R
L
L
R
L
SINGLE
(SB)
1234678 9
FEDCB
A
0
5
(U.S.A. model)
SPEAKER SETUP
12
+
For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below.
.
y
The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended
by the ITU-R (see page 102). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA
DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX.
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as the front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m
(1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly
inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in
the Sound menu (see page 60).
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker placement
More than 30 cm (12 in)
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
Note
13
English
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
Di-pole speaker layout
Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used
for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please
place the surround and surround back speakers according
to the speaker layout below.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set
this unit’s speaker impedance setting to
6 ohms before using (see page 25). If you will
use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial
setting for speaker impedance.
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this
unit is disconnected from the power source.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do
not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speaker still creates interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
3 Loosen the knob.
The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for
loosening or tightening knobs.
4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
FL
SR
SL
FR
C
SBR
SBL
30˚ 30˚
: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of di-pole speaker
Speaker connections
CAUTION
10 mm (3/8 in)
1
2
14
SPEAKER SETUP
5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or
PRESENCE speaker terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
Banana plug connections
(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
y
You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and
PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one
banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not
attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
5
4
3
Speaker terminal wrench
2
1
3
Banana plug
(With the exception of U.K., Europe
and Asia models)
15
English
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK SINGLE
R
R
L
R
R
L
L
L
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
B
PRESENCE/ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE
CENTER
R
R
L
L
R
L
SINGLE
(SB)
231
7 8 65 109
4
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back speakers
LeftRight
LeftRight LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
8
7
Speaker layout
(U.S.A. model)
LeftRight
Presence speakers
You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 60).
The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only
operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on.
The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
16
SPEAKER SETUP
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If
you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of
the FRONT A or B terminals.
The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems
simultaneously.
Bi-wired connection
The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to
one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for
each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the
tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press
SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so
that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you
only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the
left (L) terminals.
PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only)
You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see
page 66).
Note
Bi-wired connection
FRONT
R
L
+
+
+
+
A
B
This unit
Note
CONNECTIONS
17
English
PREPARATION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains
power until all connections between components are
complete.
Cable indications
Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this
unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs
to the left jacks.
Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit
are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO
jacks. When “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 65),
signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output
through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can
also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO jack
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jack
For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO
jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
Note
CAUTION
S
V
O
V
V
V
L
R
C
left analog cables
right analog cables
optical cables
coaxial cables
video cables
S-video cables
For analog signals
For digital signals
For video signals
Note
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Signal flow inside this unit
Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On”
(see page 65)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
18
CONNECTIONS
Connections for DVD playback
Connecting video components
DVD
DVD
MONITOR
AUDIOVIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
MONITOR
OUT
P
B
Y
DVD
C
O
LR
DVD player
Video
monitor
(U.S.A. model)
Optical out Video out
Audio out
Video in
Coaxial out
19
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-
amplifier.
If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign:
Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.
Notes
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIOAUDIO
DVD
DTV
CBL
/SAT
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
IN
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
IN
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
LRLR
L
R
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
LR
LR
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Multi-format player/
External decoder
For 6-channel input For 8-channel input
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Front out
Surround out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Surround
back out
20
CONNECTIONS
Connections for other video components
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a
game console or camcorder, to this unit.
AUDIOVIDEO
CBL/
SAT
OUT
VCR 1
IN
DIGITAL INPUT
CBL/SAT
COAXIAL
DVR/
VCR 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
DTVDTV
CBL/
SAT
O
LR
LR LR
C
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
(U.S.A. model)
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
Video out
Video in
Audio in
Coaxial out
S VIDEO VIDEO
L AUDIO R OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
O
V
S
L
R
Game
console or
video camera
Video out
S-video out
Audio out L
Audio out R
Optical out
21
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connections for audio components
Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
Connecting audio components
DIGITAL INPUT
GND
AUDIO
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
CD
CD
O
LRLRLR LR
LRLR
C
O
O
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
(U.S.A. model)
CD recorder
Turntable
Optical out
Coaxial out
Audio in Audio out
Optical in
Optical in
Audio inAudio out
Audio out
GND
Audio out
22
CONNECTIONS
Connecting to an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER
PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.
If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set
to “Zone B” (see page 66), signals will only be output from the
FRONT PRE OUT jacks.
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.
5 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the
corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround
back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals
output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
may not correspond to the correct speakers.
Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer.
Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 61).
Notes
Notes
FRONT
SURROUND
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE
CENTER
R
R
L
L
R
L
SINGLE
(SB)
PRE OUT
1
2
3
4
5
23
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it
to the terminals on this unit.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
1 Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
2 Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
3 Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
4 Insert the cable
wire into the slot,
and clamp it with
pliers.
5 Snap the cover into place.
Connecting the antennas
TUNER
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
MONITOR
OUT
P
B
Y
DVD
DTVDTV
CBL/
SAT
AM loop antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna
GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
Notes
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
Unit:
mm (in)
Lead wire
Clamp
Clamp
Insert the wire
into the slot
24
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other
connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an
AC wall outlet.
Do not use other AC power cables. Use the one provided.
Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard or
electrical shock.
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets
will supply power to any connected component whenever
this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) is:
Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W
Other models ........................................................... 100 W
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
General model....... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Asia model........................... AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
Connecting the power cable
AC OUTLETS
(U.S.A. model)
2
VO
L
TA
G
E
SELE
CTO
R
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model)
CAUTION
25
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.
1 On the front panel, while holding down
STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.
“SP IMP.–8MIN” appears on the front panel
display.
2 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the
impedance of your speakers.
You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms.
3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.
This unit will be set to the standby mode.
Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced
menu (see page 84).
If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to
6 ohms before turning on the power.
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote controls) to turn on the power of this
unit.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control)
to enter the standby mode.
Speaker impedance setting
Note
CAUTION
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STANDBY
/ON
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Turning on the power
Note
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
1
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
++
AMP
1
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO SETUP
26
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the auto setup procedure.
If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,
follow the troubleshooting on page 30.
YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
Wiring
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker.
Distance
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the timing of each channel.
Size
Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the
appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.
Equalizing
Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric
equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly
important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers
for some channels or have a room with unique sonic
characteristics.
YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three
parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the
seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly
precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.
Level
Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each
speaker.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to
disconnect the optimizer microphone.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.
Keep it away from direct sunlight.
Do not place it on top of this unit.
2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
AUTO SETUP
Introduction
Notes
Optimizer microphone setup
Notes
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALL R
OPTIMIZER
MIC
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
YPAO
(U.S.A. model)
Optimizer microphone position
27
English
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too
much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.
2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup,
then press h.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu,
then press h.
5 Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring,
Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then
press h.
6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select:
Check To automatically check and adjust the selected
item.
Skip To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments.
y
When using THX speakers, select Skip for Size and make
sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set
(page 61) and that “80Hz (THX)” is selected in Bass Cross
Over (page 63).
Starting the setup
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
TOP
TITLE
Sound
Option
Basic
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
ENTER
ENTER
Information
Setup Type
Start
Setup Menu
Auto Setup
System Memory
Audio Info.
Manual Setup
Input Select
Setup Menu
Setup Type
Start
Wiring
Distance
Size
Information
Skip
Check
Wiring
Distance
Size
Skip
Check
Size
Equalizing
Level
Distance
Wiring
Skip
Check
Distance
Size
Equalizing
Wiring
Skip
Check: Natural
Check: Flat
Check: Front
Equalizing
Level
Size
Distance
Skip
Check
Level
Equalizing
Size
28
AUTO SETUP
For Equalizing, press k / n to select:
Skip To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments.
Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all
speakers with higher frequencies being less
emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”
setting sounds a little harsh.
Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all
speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each
speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your
front speakers are of much higher quality
than your other speakers.
7 Once you have selected the desired setting,
press l to move back to Setup Menu.
8 Press n to select Setup Type, then select:
Auto To automatically perform the entire
auto setup procedure.
Step To pause for confirmation between
each check in the auto setup procedure.
9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER.
Loud test tones are output from each speaker and
“Measuring” appears during the auto setup
procedure.
To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor
buttons (
k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode,
press k to retry the procedure,
l to cancel auto setup.
If an error message appears during testing, refer to
“Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on
page 30, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto
setup procedure.
Setup Menu
Setup Type
Start
Wiring
Distance
Size
Information
Setup Type
Start
Auto
Step
Setup Menu
Information
Press ENTERStart
Setup Type
Setup Menu
29
English
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
You can confirm the results of each analysis.
If you set Setup Type to Auto.
The results are displayed after all items have been
analysed.
Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.
Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.
Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for
the auto setup procedure” on page 30.
Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.
If you set Setup Type to Step.
The results are displayed individually after each analysis.
•Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next
menu item.
•Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.
•Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for
the auto setup procedure” on page 30.
•Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup
procedure.
After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement
Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item
are displayed.
•Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.
•Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.
•Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for
the auto setup procedure” on page 30.
•Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.
y
If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system
parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to
the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup
menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu,
press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust,
then press ENTER.
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate
your system.
In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external
amplifier.
In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.
Confirming the results
Measurement Over
Successfully
Start
Setup Type
Setup Menu
Retry
Setup
Exit Detail
Notes
Equalizing
Size
Distance
Level
Result
Retry
Next
Exit Detail
30
AUTO SETUP
Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure
Before auto setup
During auto setup
Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.
Error message Cause Remedy
Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. Select at least one setup menu item.
Memory Guard! This setting is protected. Remove the protection setting for auto setup (see
page 67).
Error message Cause Remedy
E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B.
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
E02:No Surr. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. Check the surround speaker connections.
E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. Check the presence speaker connections.
E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Try auto setup in a quiet environment.
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners, or move them away from this unit.
E06:Check Surr. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround
back speaker(s).
E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the auto setup procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test
tones.
Check the microphone setting.
Check the speaker connections and placement.
E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled
because a setting that affects auto setup was
changed during the procedure.
Perform the auto setup procedure again.
E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure
again.
31
English
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
After auto setup
The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We
recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may
appear depending on the speakers even when
they are connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections.
W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the
speakers is excessive. (No level correction is
made.)
Readjust the speaker installation.
Check the speaker connections.
Use speakers of similar quality.
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the
measurement results of wiring (only occurs
when the wiring measurement procedure is
skipped).
Check the speaker connections.
PLAYBACK
32
1 Press STANDBY/ON (set AMP/SOURCE/TV to
AMP then press SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
When bi-wiring, select both A and B.
4 Select the input source.
Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input you desire.
The current input source name and input mode appear
in the front panel display and video monitor for a few
seconds.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DV
R
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
1 4
7
6
3
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
MENU
PURE DIRECT
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
EXIT
TOP
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MACROONOFF
EXIT
TOP
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
1
1
7
4
6
3
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
Front panel
Remote control
or
AMP
SOURCE
TV
SPEAKERS
AB
B
+10
ENT.
A
SPEAKERS
or
Front panel Remote control
INPUT
Front panel Remote control
or
DVD AUTO
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Selected input source
Input mode
VOLUME
VOL
+
or
Remote control
Front panel
33
English
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
7 Select a sound field program if desired.
Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field
program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field
program. See page 48 for details about sound field
programs.
When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following
display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal
level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX
recommendation).
Front panel operation
Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
Note
PROGRAM
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Remote control
Front panel
or
DialNorm;;+4dB
Selecting sound field programs
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT M MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
PROGRAM
(U.S.A. model)
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Hall in Munich
Program name
PROGRAM
34
PLAYBACK
Remote control operation
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of
the sound field program buttons repeatedly to
select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,
and not on the name of the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass/treble
balance for the front left/right and
center channels.
Press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly on the front panel to
select TREBLE or BASS.
Select TREBLE, then rotate
PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the high-
frequency response.
Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the low-frequency response.
To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly to select BYPASS.
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the
surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and
center speakers.
TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or
PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
If headphones are connected to this unit, the TONE CONTROL
setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones (see
page 59).
To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator flashes on the
front panel display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator
disappears from the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 60).
To listen with headphones
(“SILENT CINEMA”)
“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT
CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When
activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
This unit will not be set to SILENT CINEMA when MULTI
CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
SILENT CINEMA is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a
2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.
Notes
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
EXIT
TOP
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Sound field
program buttons
AMP/SOURCE/TV
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Hall in Munich
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Program name
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Additional operations
Notes
Notes
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MUTE
35
English
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”
appears in the front panel display and video monitor.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display
and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH
INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor.
Enjoying multi-channel software in
6.1/7.1 channel surround
If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use
this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-
channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD.
SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1
and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.
To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly
when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed.
Auto (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/
7.1 channels.
Decoders (select with l / h)
You can select from the following modes depending on the
format of the software you are playing.
PLIIxMovie
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.
PLIIxMusic
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.
EX/ES
For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
Off (OFF)
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1
channels.
y
When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see
page 62), the surround back channel will output from the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie,
PLIIxMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.
6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is
pressed in the following cases:
When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None” (see
page 62).
When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
When the source being played does not contain surround L/R
channel signals.
When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.
When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back
is set to “None” (see page 62).
“PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to
“Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 62).
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel Remote control
or
EXTD. SUR
8
Notes
36
PLAYBACK
Enjoying 2-channel software in surround
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
STANDARD on the remote control to switch
between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR.
ENHANCED programs.
Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to
select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs.
Press SELECT on the remote control to select
the decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
When you select the SUR. STANDARD program
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE
THEATER or THX program
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
y
You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter
in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 89).
You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote
control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message
display.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is
set to “None” (see page 62).
STANDARD
6
MOVIE
4
THX
5
or
SELECT
7
Note
37
English
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
(PURE DIRECT)
PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP
processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry,
allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity
from analog and PCM sources.
Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.
The button lights up and the front panel display
automatically goes out
.
y
The front panel display switches on momentarily when an
operation is performed.
To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.
The indicator around the front panel button goes out and
the previous settings are restored.
To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will
be heard.)
No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
TONE CONTROL (page 34) and GUI menu (page 53) settings
are not effective.
The following operations are not possible during PURE
DIRECT operation:
switching the sound field program
displaying the short message
adjusting GUI menu parameters
all video functions (video conversion etc.)
PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is
set to the standby mode.
Night listening modes
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the
type of material you are playing.
Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to
select cinema or music.
When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in
the front panel display lights up.
Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources
to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.
Press l / h to adjust the effect level while
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
This adjusts the level of compression.
Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
Select “MID” for standard compression.
Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored
independently.
You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT,
MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even
though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is
selected).
The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Notes
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Front panel Remote control
or
Notes
Remote control
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
38
PLAYBACK
Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-
channel sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the
remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or Both
is selected in Bass Out.
Listening to unprocessed input signals
In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are
output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.
If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP
activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA
DSP sound field program.
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is
set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases:
When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine images from a video source with sound
from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery
from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons to select a video
source, then select an audio source.
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.
Note
Note
2ch Stereo
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
Front panel Remote control
or
Note
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
Video sources
39
English
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signal you want to
use.
1 Select the input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals
*
2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound
field program.
y
You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 67).
DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD
encoded in DTS.
If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
Displaying information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1 Press TOP on the remote control.
2 Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info.
The following information appears in the
display.
Format Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “?” appears.
Channel Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2
surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
Dialogue Dialogue normalization information
for Dolby Digital signals.
Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “– – –” appears.
Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
Selecting input modes
Note
INPUT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel Remote control
INPUT MODE
DVD AUTO
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
TRANSMIT
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
Front panel Remote control
or
Input mode
Sampling
Bitrate
Channel
Format
Flag1
Flag2
Dialogue
---
---
2/0/---
Analog
---
---
---
Auto Setup
Audio Info
System Memory
TUNING
40
There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Automatic tuning
1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l
to tune into a lower frequency.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown on the front panel display.
Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an
FM station will automatically change the reception mode
to monaural to increase the signal quality.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue searching.
TUNING
Automatic and manual tuning
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
1
3
3
24
PURE DIRECT
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
A~~AM~1440 kHz
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD T
U
AUTO
A
SP
PRESET/
TUNING
A~~AM~1530 kHz
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD T
U
TUNE
D
AUTO
A
SP
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Disappears
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
A~~AM~1440 kHz
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD T
U
A
SP
PRESET/
TUNING
41
English
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through
E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting
stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
Presetting stations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
321
(U.S.A. model)
FM/AM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
AUTO
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
42
TUNING
Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations
in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 40 for tuning instructions.
When tuned into a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears on the front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
3 2,5
4
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
(U.S.A. model)
A :AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
A/B/C/D/E
C :AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Notes
PRESET/
TUNING
C3:AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
C3:AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
43
English
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
When performing this operation with the remote
control, first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE,
then press TUNER to set the remote to tuner
mode.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station
group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/–
on the remote control) to select a preset
station number (1 through 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
1
2
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
1
(U.S.A. model)
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
or
Front panel Remote control
PRESET/
TUNING
CH
+
PRESET
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNE
R
TUNED
A
SP
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
or
Front panel
Remote control
Exchanging preset stations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
D
VR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
1,3
1,3
2,4
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
(U.S.A. model)
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
C
R2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
TUNED
MEMORY
A
SP
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
A5:FM 90.6 MHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R
A
SP
EDIT E1-A5
44
TUNING
RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system
used by FM stations in many countries. The RDS function
is carried out among the network stations.
This unit can receive various RDS data such as PS
(Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio
Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other
Networks) when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.
PS (Program Service name) mode:
The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.
PTY (Program Type) mode:
There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.
RT (Radio Text) mode:
Information about the program (such as the title of the
song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being
received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other
characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with
under-bars.
CT (Clock Time) mode:
The current time is displayed and updated every minute.
If the data flow is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may
appear.
EON (Enhanced Other Networks):
See “EON function” on page 46.
Four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS
data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that
correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station
light up in the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/
FREQ (or FREQ/RDS on the remote control) repeatedly
to display the various RDS data offered by the
transmitting station as shown below.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until an RDS indicator lights
up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if
you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has
not finished receiving all of the RDS data from the station.
RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.
This unit cannot utilize the RDS data source if the signal
received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode
requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT
mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY,
etc.) are displayed.
RDS data may not be received under poor reception conditions.
In such cases, press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this
will change the reception mode to manual, RDS data may be
displayed when you change the display to RDS mode.
If the signal strength is weakened by external interference
during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service
may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front
panel display.
Receiving RDS stations
NEWS News
AFFAIRS Current affairs
INFO General information
SPORT Sports
EDUCATE Education
DRAMA Drama
CULTURE Culture
SCIENCE Science
VARIED Light entertainment
POP M Pop
ROCK M Rock
M.O.R. M
Middle-of-the-road music
(easy-listening)
LIGHT M Light classics
CLASSICS Serious classics
OTHER M Other music
Changing the RDS mode
Notes
RDS MODE
/FREQ
FREQ/RDS
PS
PTY
RT
CT
Frequency
display mode
or
Front panel
Remote control
45
English
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
If you select the desired program type, this unit
automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are
broadcasting a program of the required type.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the
PTY SEEK mode.
The program type of the station being received or
“NEWS” blinks in the front panel display.
To exit from the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK
MODE again.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/–
on the remote control) to select the desired
program type.
The selected program type appears on the front panel
display.
3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching
all preset RDS stations.
The selected program type flashes and the PTY
HOLD indicator lights up on the front panel display
while searching for stations.
To cancel searching, press PTY SEEK START again.
The unit stops searching when it finds a station
broadcasting the selected type of program.
If the found station is not the one you desire one,
press PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes
searching for another station broadcasting the same
type of program.
PTY SEEK function
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
EON PTY SEEK
MODE START
RDS MODE
/FREQ
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
2
1 3
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
EXIT
TOP
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
1, 3
2
(Europe model)
PTY SEEK
MODE
START
Blinks
MODE PTY SEEK START
Front panel
or
Remote control
PRESET/
TUNING
CH
+
PRESET
Front panel
or
Remote control
PTY HOLD
PTY SEEK
MODE
START
Lights up
MODE PTY SEEK START
or
Remote control
Front panel
46
TUNING
This function uses the EON data service on the RDS
station network. If you select the desired program type
(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit
automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are
scheduled to broadcast the selected type of program and
switches from the station currently being received to the
new station when the broadcast starts.
This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers
the EON data service is being received. When such a station is
being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
1 Check that the EON indicator is lit on the
front panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another
RDS station so that the EON indicator lights up.
2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or
SPORT).
The selected program type name appears on the front
panel display.
If a preset RDS station type starts broadcasting the
selected type of program, the unit automatically
switches from the program being received to that
program. (EON indicator flashes.)
When broadcasting of the selected program ends,
the unit returns to the previous station (or another
program on the same station).
To cancel this function
Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is
shown on the front panel display.
EON function
Note
RDS MODE
/FREQ
EON
EON
Front panel
or
Remote control
RECORDING
47
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT control
to record one source while watching and/or listening to
another source.
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for those components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2 or
REC OUT.
To record the current input source that you are
watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or
REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE.
To record a source other than the one that you are
watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or
REC OUT to the source you want to record.
After this setting, you can change the source you
are listening to and/or watching without effecting
the recording by rotating INPUT (or pressing one
of the input selector buttons on the remote control).
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
y
To record audio and video from different sources, set REC
OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a
video source first then select an audio source (see page 38).
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 (U.S.A.,
Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) are always
the same.
When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, Speaker Level
(page 64) and programs does not affect recorded material.
A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal to your VCR.
Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.
Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are
not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your
source component is connected to provide only digital (or
analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.
A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player
is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation
instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
RECORDING
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
SOURCE
/REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD–R
TUNER
CD
DVD
D–TV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
/VCR2
DVR
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
EON PTY SEEK
MODE START
RDS MODE
/FREQ
PURE DIRECT
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
21
ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE 2
(U.S.A. model)
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR2
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR2
Notes
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
48
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 39) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Notes
For movie/video sources
Program Features Sources
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as is.
MULTI
2-CH
ENTERTAINMENT:
TV Sports
Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the
sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence
sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Game
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
MOVIE THEATER:
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm
movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the
sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER:
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the
latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space
amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
MOVIE THEATER:
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of
the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to
that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained
as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER:
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The
presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,
restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.
THX:
THX Cinema
THX processing for any multi-channel sources (including DTS-ES).
49
English
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
THX:
THX Surr. EX
THX processing for any 5.1 channel source.
MULTI
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIxMovie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIxMovie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital
sources.
DTS:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.
DTS:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96 kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS 96/24:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS ES:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
DTS ES:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS 96 kHz/
24-bit DTS sources.
DTS 96/24 ES:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for 96kHz/24-bit
DTS sources.
Program Features Sources
50
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
2-CH
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources.
PLIIx Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
PLIIx Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for movie software.
PLII Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PLII Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic II) for movie software.
PLIIx Game:
SUR. STANDARD
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.
PLII Game:
SUR. STANDARD
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.
Neo:6 Cinema:
SUR. STANDARD
DTS processing for movie software.
Neo:6 Cinema:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (DTS Neo:6) for movie software.
Program Features Sources
51
English
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
For music sources
Program Features Sources
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
2 (left and right) channel playback.
MULTI
2-CH
STEREO:
7ch Stereo
Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
MUSIC:
Hall in Munich
HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500
seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the
walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.
MUSIC:
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,
rich sound.
MUSIC:
Freiburg
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a
high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early
reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.
MUSIC:
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous
New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering
a real and vibrant sound.
MUSIC:
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this
program was recorded at LAs “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left
of the hall.
MUSIC:
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if
you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.
MUSIC:
Classic/Opera
CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by
restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it
reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-
energy, “immediate” sound.
q D+PLIIxMusic:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
MULTI
q D+PLIIxMusic:
SUR. ENHANCED
DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.
2-CH
PLII Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.
Neo:6 Music:
SUR. STANDARD
DTS processing for music software.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
52
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S).
Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to
set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time for
the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator goes off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front
panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Using the sleep timer
TRANSMIT
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
2
SLEEP
SLEEP 120 min SLEEP 90 min
SLEEP 60 minSLEEP 30 minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
SLEEP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Hall in Munich
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
SLEEP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
SLEEP
SYSTEM OPTIONS
53
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates.
Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround)
Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 89).
Input Select (Input select)
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack.
Manual Setup (Manual setup)
Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings.
Sound (Sound)
Use to manually adjust the sound parameters.
Basic (Basic)
Use to quickly setup basic system parameters.
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Item Features Page
I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
56
Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
56
Rename Changes the name of the input.
57
Multi CH Assign Selects the number of audio channels input through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
57
Item Features Page
LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
58
Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
58
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.
59
Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones.
59
Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.
60
Item Features Page
Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.
61
Speaker Set
Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output,
and the cross over frequency.
61
Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
64
Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
64
54
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Option (Option)
Use to adjust the optional system settings.
Auto Setup (Auto setup)
Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26).
System Memory (System memory)
Use to save and recall various settings (see page 67).
Audio Info. (Audio signal information)
Use to check audio signal information (see page 39).
Item Features Page
Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.
65
Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings.
66
Surr.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs.
66
Input Mode Selects the initial input mode of the source.
67
Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings.
67
55
English
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then
press h to enter the selected menu.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
5 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n
repeatedly to change the setting of the item
you want to adjust.
6 Press EXIT.
y
If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press
ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item.
The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n.
You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is
set to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set
Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67).
Changing parameter settings
EXIT
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
1
3-5
6
Center
Surround
Front
Speaker Set
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Test Tone
None
Large
Small
Surround
Surround Back
Presence
Center
Front
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
60Hz
40Hz
90Hz
100Hz
80Hz (THX)
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
Bass Out
Presence
60Hz
40Hz
90Hz
100Hz
80Hz (THX)
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
Bass Out
Presence
56
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the
input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the
signal input to each jack.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Select Input Select, then press h.
4 Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then
press h to access and adjust.
I/O Assignment
(Input / output assignment)
You can assign the digital audio input/output and
component video jacks to other components if this unit’s
initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change
the following parameters to reassign the jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component using INPUT SELECTOR on
the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote
control.
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >
I/O Assignment >
Example 1:
To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input.
1) Select Input Select, then select DVD.
2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select
7 CD.
Example 2:
To clear a jack assignment.
1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD,
etc.).
2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment
(Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or
Component Video).
3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the
assignment.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
Volume Trim (Volume trim)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Volume Trim >
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Input Select
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVD
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
Stereo/Surround
Notes
Optical Input
Coaxial Input
Optical Output
I/O Assignment
Volume Trim
Rename
57
English
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the
GUI and front panel display. (DVD is used as the source
component in the following example.)
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename
1 Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or character you want to edit.
3 Press ENTER to select a character type
(CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK).
4 Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and l / h to move to the next one.
You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press
ENTER to switch between character types:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK !, #, %, &, etc.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.
5 Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER
when complete.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Multi CH Assign
(Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an
external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the
additional front signals.
Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign
Input Channels
This setting is used to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6ch, 8ch
If Zone2 Amplifier (page 66) is set to “Internal”, no sound is
output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”.
In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external
component to 6 channels.
Front Input
If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select
analog jacks to which front signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
CAPITAL
OK RESET
DVD
I/O Assignment
Volume Trim
Rename
Note
Input Channels
Front Input
Multi CH Assign
Volume Trim
58
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Select Manual Setup, then press h.
4 Select Sound, then press h.
5 Select the desired parameters, then press h
to access and adjust.
LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:
Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level >
Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)
Speaker (Speaker)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone (Headphone)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be
output from the SUBWOOFER jack.
Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting
is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital
and DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:
Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range >
Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),
MIN (minimum)
Speaker (Speaker)
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone (Headphone)
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
Select “STD” for general use.
Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Manual setup: Sound
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Dynamic Range
LFE Level
Tone Control
Audio Option
Parametric EQ
Sound
Basic
Option
Speaker
Headphone
0.0dB
Note
Speaker
Headphone
STD
MIN
MAX
59
English
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the PEQ for any speaker.
1 Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker
you want to adjust.
Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output
when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker.
Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left
speaker.
Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right
speaker.
Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center
speaker.
Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround left speaker.
Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround right speaker.
Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround back left speaker.
Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround back right speaker.
Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the
presence left speaker.
Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the
presence right speaker.
2 Press h to access the settings window.
3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press
ENTER to select a parameter from Band
(band), Freq (frequency) or Q (Q factor).
4 Press n EDIT and press ENTER to access the
edit window.
The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted.
•Press l / h to adjust the parameter.
•Press k / n to adjust the Gain.
Press ENTER to exit the edit window.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied
with the results.
y
If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the
selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER.
6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the
settings window.
y
If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a
graphic equalizer.
For more information on the parametric equalizer, see
“PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 104.
Tone Control (Tone control)
Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your
speakers and headphones.
Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control >
Control (Tone control)
Choices: Defeat, Speaker, Headphone
Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any
adjustments.
Select “Speaker” to adjust the bass/treble balance of
your speakers.
Select “Headphone” to adjust the bass/treble balance of
your headphones.
Front L
Front R
Test Tone
Dynamic Range
LFE Level
Tone Control
Audio Option
Parametric EQ
Front L
Band / Gain
PARAM RESET
EDIT EXIT
Front R
Center
Test Tone
Front L
Q
Freq.
Gain
Band
1.000
125.0Hz
0.0dB
#1
Front R
Center
Test Tone
Speaker
Headphone
Defeat
Bass
Treble
Control
60
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB
You can adjust three frequency bands: 125Hz, 350Hz,
500Hz.
Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB
You can adjust three frequency bands: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz,
8.0kHz.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
TONE CONTROL is not effective when:
The THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected.
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
Audio Option (Audio option)
Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings.
Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option >
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: Full, –20dB
Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound.
Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio Delay (Audio delay)
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
PR/SB Select (Presence speakers / surround
back speakers select)
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker
set when playing sources that contain surround back
channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field
programs.
Choices: Presence, Surround Back
Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers
when a surround back channel signal is detected in a
CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will
be output from front speakers.
Note
Bass
Treble
Control
Speaker
Freq : 125Hz
Gain : 0.0dB
+6
+0
+6
Bass
Treble
Control
Speaker
Freq : 3.5kHz
Gain : 0.0dB
+6
+0
+6
Muting Type
Audio Delay
PR/SB Select
-20dB
Full
Muting Type
Audio Delay
PR/PB Select
0ms
Muting Type
Audio Delay
PR/SB Select
Surround Back
Presence
61
English
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this menu to set up basic system parameters.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Select Manual Setup, then press h.
4 Select Basic, then press h.
5 Select the desired parameters, then press h
to access and adjust.
Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set
automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic
menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running
auto setup first.
You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup
procedure (see page 26).
Test Tone (Test tone)
Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set,
Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.
Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone >
Choices: Off, On
y
If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.
This menu item is also available in the front panel display
system options menu (see page 85).
Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case,
make sure no children are present in the listening room.
Speaker Set (Speaker set)
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Set any THX speakers to Small.
Front (Front speakers)
Choices: Large, Small
Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.
Center (Center speaker)
Choices: Large, Small, None
Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The
unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal
to the center speaker.
Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.
Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
Manual setup: Basic
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Test Tone
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Speaker Set
Sound
Basic
Option
Off
On
Speaker Set
Speaker Distance
Test Tone
Note
Note
Large
Small
Center
Surround
Front
Large
Small
NoneSurround
Surround Back
Center
Front
62
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Choices: Large, Small, None
Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right
speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the
surround speakers. The entire range of the surround
channel signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass
Out.
Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers.
This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
(see page 38) and automatically sets the surround back
speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”.
Surround Back
(Surround back left/right speakers)
Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2,
Large x2, None
Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back left
speaker.
Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected with
Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are
directed to the surround back left speaker.
Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected with
Bass Out.
Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
Select “None” if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the
SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals.
Large
Small
NoneSurround Back
Presence
Surround
Center
Front
Note
Small x1
Small x2
Large x1
None
Large x2
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Surround
Center
63
English
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Presence (Presence speakers)
Choices: None, Yes
Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers.
This unit directs all presence channel signals to the
front left and right speakers.
Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers.
When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 66),
Presence is automatically set to “None”.
Bass Out (Bass out)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These low-
frequency signals can be directed to both front left and
right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be used
for both stereo reproduction and sound field programs).
Choices: Both, SWFR, Front
THX recommendation: SWFR
Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer.
Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both
the subwoofer and front channels, and all other low-
frequency signals are directed in accordance with other
speaker settings.
Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit
directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in
accordance with other speaker settings.
Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer.
The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to
the front speakers (even if you have previously set
Front to Small in Speaker Set).
Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz,
110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX)
SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase)
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your
subwoofer.
Choices: Normal, Reverse
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Note
None
Yes
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
Surround
Both
SWFR
Front
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
60Hz
40Hz
80Hz (THX)
90Hz
100Hz
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
Normal
Reverse
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
64
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective
channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance
from the main listening position. However, this is not
possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount
of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker
so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the
same time.
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance >
Unit (Unit)
Choices: Meter, Feet
Initial setting:
U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet
Other models: Meter
Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters.
Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker Distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker.
Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker.
Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker.
Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the
surround back left speaker.
Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the
surround back right speaker.
Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left
speaker.
Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right
speaker.
Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the
distance in Surround Back L.
Speaker Level (Speaker level)
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left speakers and each speaker selected
in Speaker Set (see page 61).
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.
Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.
Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker.
Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left
speaker.
Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right
speaker.
Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround
back left speaker.
Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the
surround back right speaker.
Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and
presence left speakers.
Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and
presence right speakers.
Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.
y
To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use the Test
Tone (see page 61).
This menu item is also available in the front panel display
system options menu (see page 85).
You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance
in Surround Back L.
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Test Tone
Speaker Set
Front L
Front R
Subwoofer
Unit
Center
Meter
Feet
Front L
Front R
Subwoofer
Unit
Presence R
Notes
Notes
Speaker Distance
Presence R
Subwoofer
Speaker Level
Speaker Set
Front R
Center
Front L
65
English
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Select Manual Setup, then press h.
4 Select Option then press h.
5 Select the desired parameters, then press h
to access and adjust.
6 When finished adjusting parameters, press
ENTER.
Display (Display)
Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays.
Manual Setup > Option > Display >
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
Video Conv. (Video conversion)
Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite
(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.
This allows you to output converted video signals from the
S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no
S-video or component signals are input. This feature also
converts S-video signals to component signals when no
component signals are input.
Choices: Off, On
Select “Off” not to convert any signals.
Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video
and component signals, and to convert S-video signals
to component signals.
y
When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv.
to “Off”.
Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (composite or S-video) between each component.
When converting composite video or S-video signals from a
VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
Short Message (Short message)
Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display.
Choices: Off, On
Select “Off” to turn off the short message display.
Select “On” to turn on the short message display.
The short message display may not display properly depending
on the type of input signal and video monitor used.
If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not
displayed even if “On” is selected.
Position (Position)
Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the
GUI display.
Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
Press k to raise the position of the GUI display.
Press n to lower the position of the GUI display.
Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the
right.
Press
l
to shift the position of the GUI display to the left.
Wall Paper (Wallpaper)
Use this feature to select the background when no image is
input from an external source. If you do not want to
display the background, select None.
Choices: None, Yes, Gray Back
If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if
“Yes” is selected.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Manual setup: Option
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Multi Zone
Display
Input Mode
Memory Guard
Surr.Initialize
Sound
Basic
Option
Display
Surr.Initialize
Multi Zone
Short Message
Position
Dimmer
Video Conv.
Wall Paper
Notes
Notes
Note
66
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Multi Zone (Multi zone)
Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B
settings.
Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone >
Speaker B (Speaker B)
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: Main, ZoneB
Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
Select “ZoneB” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES
jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones
and SPEAKERS B.
When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier)
Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified.
Choices: Internal, External, None
Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers
through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s
ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.
Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if
you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s
PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.
Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2
feature.
When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting
automatically switches to “None”.
When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting
automatically switches to “Variable”.
Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume)
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2
Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically
set to “Variable”.
Choices: Fixed, Variable
Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.
Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume)
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: Fixed, Variable
Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Surr.Initialize (Surround initialize)
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within sound field program groups. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in
blue.
Manual Setup > Option > Surr.Initialize
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All
•Press k / n to select the sound field program you want
to initialize, then press ENTER.
Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field
program parameters.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory
Guard is set to “Guard” (see page 67).
Notes
Notes
Display
Surr.Initialize
Input Mode
Multi Zone
Zone2 Amplifier
Zone2 Volume
Speaker B
Zone 3 Volume
Note
Multi Zone
Display
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
SURROUND
All
Input Mode
Memory Guard
Surr.Initialize
67
English
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Input Mode (Input mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on
this unit.
Manual Setup > Option > Input Mode
Choices: Auto, Last
Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected
source.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD.
SUR button.
Memory Guard (Memory Guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard
Choices: Free, Guard
Select “Guard” to protect:
DSP program parameters
All GUI menu items except Memory Guard and
System Memory – Load
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 85).
In general, front panel and remote control operations are not
affected by “Guard” functions. However, you cannot adjust the
tone control using TONE CONTROL.
This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite
settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can
save settings such as the following:
Sound field program parameters
Speaker settings
Speaker channel settings
LFE level
Dynamic range settings
Parametric equalizer settings
To save settings
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Select System Memory, then press h.
4 Select Save, then press ENTER.
Current displays the current settings of this unit.
5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory
number under which you want to save the
settings, then press h.
“Save:ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
6 Press ENTER to save the settings.
Note
Note
Multi Zone
Input Mode
Surr.Initialize
Memory Guard
Auto
Last
Input Mode
Surr.Initialize
Memory Guard
Free
Guard
System Memory
AMP
SOURCE
TV
The Bottom Line
Speaker
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
A:ON B:OFF
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset
Current
Memory 1
Memory 2
68
SYSTEM OPTIONS
To recall settings
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Select System Memory, then press h.
4 Select Load, then press ENTER.
5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory
number you want to recall, then press h.
“Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
6 Press ENTER to recall the settings.
y
Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by
pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control.
When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1?
Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press
MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings.
When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2?
Yes: Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press
MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
The Bottom Line
Speaker
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
A:ON B:OFF
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset
Current
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
0
MEMORY1 2
9
0
MEMORY1 2
9
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
69
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by
YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the
appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire
functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.
Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the
AMP mode.
Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the
selected component appears in the display window.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Control area
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
PRESET
EXIT
TOP
1 2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
The buttons inside
the dotted lines
control this unit in
any mode
(SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, INPUT
MODE, the input
selector buttons,
VOLUME +/–,
MUTE, PURE
DIRECT and
STRAIGHT/
EFFECT).
AMP/SOURCE/
TV
Set to AMP to
operate this unit.
Display
window
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
THX SURROUND SUR. BACK
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
PRESET
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
CHP/INDEX
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
THX SURROUND SUR. BACK
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER
AVTV
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
+
PRESET
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
CHP/INDEX
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
THX SURROUND SUR. BACK
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER
AVTV
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
+
PRESET
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
RETURN
DISPLAY
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
+
PRESET
EXIT
TOP
1 2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Component
control area
You can control up
to 14 different
components by
setting appropriate
remote control
codes (see page 80).
A/B buttons and the
input selector buttons
switch the function
of the component
control area below.
*
Use the A/B
buttons to control
other components
regardless of whether
they are connected to
this unit.
Factory setting:
A...LD player
B...Tape deck
Display
window
AMP/
SOURCE/
TV
Set to
SOURCE to
operate the
component
selected with
an input
selector
button.
Set to TV to
operate the
television
(you must set
the remote
control code
in DTV or
PHONO).
SELECT k / n
switches control to
another component
without changing
the input source on
this unit.
70
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling optional components
(OPTN area)
OPTN is an additional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until
OPTN appears in the display window.
You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 72
to program buttons operated within this component control
area.
The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is
selected in the amplifier library (see page 71).
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
*
Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses.
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In
this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
Notes
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Library
(Component
category)
Default YAMAHA
code
*
A LD 2200
B TAPE 2700, (2701)
PHONO TV –
TUNER TUNER
2600, (0203, 1203,
1358, 2601)
CD CD 2300, (2301)
MULTI CH
INPUT
DVD
2102, (0517, 0566,
0572, 2100, 2101)
V-AUX VCR
CBL/SAT CABLE
MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502)
CD-R CD-R 2400
DTV TV
VCR 1 VCR
DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807
DVD DVD
2102, (0517, 0566,
0572, 2100, 2101)
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
71
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected
component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in
the display window.
y
If you want to setup for another component, press the input
selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.
Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press l / h. You can set a
different type of component.
Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD,
L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner),
L:AMP
*
, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite),
L:VCR
* The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “2000” in
order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by
entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary.
When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components simultaneously
with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the
alternative codes to operate this unit separately.
4 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
“0000” appears in the display window if no code has been
set.
5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-
digit remote control code for the component
you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
Notes
LEARN
AMP library
code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control ID
(this unit’s
setting:
see
page 84)
2000
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial
setting)
2001
To operate this unit using the
default code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features (see page 81).
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K.,
Europe and Australia models
only)
2002
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
2003
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features of other YAMAHA
receivers/amplifiers (see
page 81).
Note
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
72
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
6 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button or
SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4
through 6.
7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the remote control code is correct.
y
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button simultaneously.
The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote
control supplied with the component.
Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions
not included in the basic operations covered by remote
control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not
available. You can program any of the buttons available in
the component control area (see page 69). The buttons can
be programmed independently for each component.
This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote
control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn
most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program
some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to
the operating instructions for the other remote control.)
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
Notes
LEARN
TRANSMIT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
Programming codes from other
remote controls (Learn)
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
TRANSMIT
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
73
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.
“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.
Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
5 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window.
6 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window.
“NG” appears in the display window if learning was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.
y
If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5
and 6.
If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press the input selector button or
SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps
3 through 6.
7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button simultaneously.
This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
Notes
LEARN
TRANSMIT
MENU
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
EXIT
TOP
TRANSMIT
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
Notes
LEARN
74
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use a
different name than the factory preset. This is useful when
you have set the input selector to control a different
component.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press RE-NAME again.
4 Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z,
1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash),
and space.
(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)
5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next
position.
6 Press ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window if renaming was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if renaming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
y
If you continuously want to rename another component,
press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select
the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.
7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one
button simultaneously.
Changing source names in the
display window
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
RE-NAME
ENTER
Note
ENTER
RE-NAME
75
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,
when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button
to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.
The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 76).
*1
You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For
details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)
*2
Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that
component (see page 72) or set a remote control code (see page 70).
*3
When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
Using the Macro feature
Macro buttons First Second Third
(*1)
(CD area) (*2)
(MD/TAPE area) (*2)
(CD-R area) (*2)
(VCR 1 area) (*2)
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*2)
(DVD area) (*2)
CD
POWER
SYSTEM
CD
(CD area)
Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order
STANDBY
STANDBY
POWER
SYSTEM
POWER
SYSTEM
A
B
PHONO
POWER
SYSTEM
PHONO
TUNER
TUNER
(*3)
CD
CD
MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD-R
DTV
DTV
VCR 1
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVR/VCR2
DVD
DVD
76
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Macro operations
1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.
2 Press a macro button.
When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO
ON/OFF to OFF.
While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not
accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is
complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
Programming macro operations
You can program your own macros and use the macro
feature to transmit several remote control commands in
sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote
control codes or perform learning operations before
programming the macro. We do not recommend
programming continuous operations such as volume
control in a macro.
The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3 Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the
selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window.
“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a
button other than a macro button.
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
TRANSMIT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
MACROMACRO ON/OFF
Macro buttons
Notes
Note
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACRO
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
77
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode.
To change the selected source component, press
SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will
program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes
the selected component and corresponding component control
area.
5 Press MACRO again when the operation
sequence you want to program is complete.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and
setup remote control codes.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press CLEAR again.
3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.
L:DVD (L: name of a component)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L:ALL Clears all learned functions.
M:ALL Clears all programmed macros
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.
4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing
was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display
window.
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
“L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
Note
Note
Memory back-up
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries,
set up the remote control code(s) and program any
acquired functions that may have been cleared.
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
1
2
3
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
MCR 1: DVD
MCR 2: AV POWER
MCR 3: h
Clearing function sets
Note
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
CLEAR
CLEAR
78
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode.
“C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.
“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.
Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
Notes
CLEAR
Clearing individual functions
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
LEARN
79
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the button you
want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful.
y
If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the learning mode.
6 Press LEARN again to exit.
“C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful.
y
If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3.
Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the macro
programming mode.
5 Press MACRO again to exit.
“C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
Note
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACRO
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
80
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use
this remote to control your other components. Note that some
buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use
the input selector buttons to select the component you want to
operate. The remote control automatically switches to the
appropriate control mode for that component.
*1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control
code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.
*3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.
*4
These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only.
Controlling each component
DVD player/
DVD recorder
VCR
Cable TV/
Satellite tuner
TV LD player CD player
MD recorder/
CD recorder
Tape deck Tuner
1 AV P OW E R
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
VCR power
*3
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
2 TV POWER
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
Power
*1
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
3 TV VOL +
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
Volume +
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV VOL –
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
Volume –
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
CH +
TV channel +
*2
Channel +
Channel + Channel +
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
PRESET +
CH –
TV channel –
*2
Channel –
Channel – Channel –
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
PRESET –
TV INPUT/
A/B/C/D/E
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
Input
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
Direction A/B
A/B/C/D/E
TV MUTE
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
Mute
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
4 TITLE
Title Title Title Title
5 MENU
Menu Menu Menu
6 ENTER
Menu enter Menu select Menu select
k Menu up Menu up Menu up
n Menu down Menu down Menu down
l Menu left Menu left Menu left
h Menu right Menu right Menu right
7 RETURN
Return Return Return Return
8 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Preset stations (1-8)
9 ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
VCR search
backward
*3
VCR search
backward
*3
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
FREQ
*4
hh Search forward Search forward
VCR search
forward
*3
VCR search
forward
*3
Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward
EON
*4
b Skip backward
Chapter/Skip
backward
Skip backward Skip backward Direction back
PTY MODE
*4
a Skip forward
Chapter/Skip
forward
Skip forward Skip forward
Direction
forward
PTY START
*4
REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec
*3
VCR rec
*3
Disc skip Rec Rec
s Stop Stop
VCR stop
*3
VCR stop
*3
Stop Stop Stop Stop
e Pause Pause
VCR pause
*3
VCR pause
*3
Pause Pause Pause Pause
h Play Play
VCR play
*3
VCR play
*3
Play Play Play Play
0 AUDIO
Audio Audio
A DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display
B ENTER
Enter Enter/recall
Enter/
numeric button
TRANSMIT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
PRESET
1
2
3
5
4
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
MENU
0
A
B
6
7
8
9
EXIT
TOP
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
EXIT
TOP
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
81
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit
to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control
this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
A video monitor for the second room.
y
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit
in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult
with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center
for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your
requirements.
Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the
CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products,
you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six
YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.
System configuration and connections example
Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 66).
When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the
amplifier in the second/third room.
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
CONTROL OUT
This unit
Notes
REMOTE OUT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
MONITOR OUT
SP OUT
REMOTE 1 IN
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
REMOTE 2 IN
MAIN
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
Infrared emitter
DVD player
(or other component)
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Second room Third roomMain room
SYSTEM
This unit
82
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
Using this unit’s internal amplifier
To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 66).
The supplied remote control can be used to control
Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and
control components located in the main room directly
from the second/third room regardless of the listening
condition in the main room.
To enable Zone mode on the remote
control
You will be able to switch the remote control mode from
one room to another, and use the input selector,
STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and
VOLUME +/– to control the selected room.
1 Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to
SOURCE/REMOTE.
2 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in
“Setting remote control codes” on page 70.
3 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”.
4 Press ENTER.
“2000” appears in the display window.
5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”.
For details, see page 71.
6 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.
The remote control will be able to operate this unit
from Zone 2 or Zone 3.
To control Zone 2/Zone 3
1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window.
2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or
Zone 3 power on.
R
L
+
PRESENCE/ ZONE 2
Second room
This unit
Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR2
ENTER
LEARN
SELECT
or
83
English
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
3 Press an input selector button to select the
input source you want to listen to in the
second/third room.
The display window shows “2: name of selected
input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote
control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to
Zone 2/Zone 3.
4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone
3 by using the input selector, STANDBY,
SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/–
buttons.
* VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or
Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu (see
page 66).
5 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/
Zone 3 mode.
The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are
always the same.
“ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only
when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed
Turning this unit to either on or standby
SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently
depending on the selected mode that appears on the
display window.
When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you
can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby
individually.
When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or
“2002” (see page 71) is selected as the amplifier library
(L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and
Zone 3 to on/standby simultaneously.
*
“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER
or STANDBY is pressed.
Special considerations for DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to
send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will
only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers).
Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need
to be made when playing DTS encoded discs.
For DVDs encoded with DTS
Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the
second/third room.
Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-
channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby
Digital soundtrack.
For CDs encoded in DTS
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/
Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
Note
Notes
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
EXIT
TOP
MENU
PURE DIRECT
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
VOL
+
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
*
LCD display
SYSTEM POWER/
STANDBY
Normal mode
*
Name of component
Turns the main unit
on/standby
Zone 2 mode
“Zone2” or “2:name of
component”
Turns Zone 2 to on/
standby
Zone 3 mode
“Zone3” or “3:name of
component”
Turns Zone 3 to on/
standby
System mode
“SYSTM”
Turns everything (the
main unit, Zone 2,
Zone 3) on/standby
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
84
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the
front panel display.
This menu offers additional operations to adjust and
customize the way this unit operates. Change the settings
to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode.
2 On the front panel, while holding down
STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.
3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired
operation.
The name of the selected operation appears in the
front panel display.
4 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the
setting.
5 Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting
This unit enters the standby mode.
y
The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of
this unit.
SP IMP. (Speaker impedance)
Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that
of your speakers.
Choices: 6MIN, 8MIN
Select “6MIN” for speakers that are 6 ohm or higher.
Select “8MIN” for speakers that are 8 ohm or higher.
PRESET (Factory preset)
Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial
factory settings with the exception of System Memory and
Auto Setup settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this
unit’s parameters.
Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters.
REMOTE (Remote control ID)
Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition
(see page 71).
Choices: ID1, ID2
Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library
code is set to “2000” or “2001”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library
code is set to “2002” or “2003”.
FAN MODE (Fan operation mode)
Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan.
Choices: AUTO, CONT
Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically
according to the temperature of this unit.
Select “CONT” to set the fan to operate continuously
regardless of the temperature of this unit.
TU (Tuner frequency step)
(Asia and General models only)
Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the
frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
Advanced setup menu
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STANDBY
/ON
PROGRAM
85
English
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access
most GUI menu system option parameters without using a
video monitor.
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to
enter the menu.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then
press ENTER to enter the selected item.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to
change the setting of the item you want to
adjust.
6 Press DISPLAY to exit.
y
If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return
to the previously selected menu item.
AUTO SETUP
Front panel display system options menu
EXIT
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2, 6
1
3-5
Item Sub-items Features
SETUP
AUTO
RELOAD
Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup
adjusts.
Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu (see
page 27).
EQ
NATURAL
FLAT
FRONT
Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup
uses.
Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI
menu (see page 28).
START [ENTER] Use to activate the auto setup procedure.
Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 28).
86
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
MANUAL SETUP
1 BASIC MENU
Item Sub-items Features
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT;;;;SMALL
CENTER;;;;;SML
SURR.LR;;;;SML
SURR.B;;;SMLx2
PRESENCE;;NONE
BASS OUT;;SWFR
SWFR C/O;;80Hz
SWFR PHASE;NRM
Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the
speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
cross over frequency.
Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu (see
page 61).
B)SP DISTANCE
UNIT;;;;meters
FRONT L;;;3.0m
FRONT R;;;3.0m
CENTER;;;;3.0m
SURR L;;;;3.0m
SURR R;;;;3.0m
SB L;;;;;;2.1m
SB R;;;;;;2.1m
SWFR;;;;;;3.0m
PRES L;;;;3.0m
PRES R;;;;3.0m
FRONT L;;;10.0
FRONT R;;;10.0
CENTER;;;;10.0
SURR L;;;;10.0
SURR R;;;;10.0
SB L;;;;;;;7.0
SB R;;;;;;;7.0
SWFR;;;;;;10.0
PRES L;;;;10.0
PRES R;;;;10.0
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu
(see page 64).
C)SP LEVEL
FR-----||-----
C-----||-----
FL-----||-----
SL-----||-----
SBL-----||-----
SBR-----||-----
SR-----||-----
SWFR-----||-----
PR.R-----||-----
PR.L-----||-----
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu (see
page 64).
D)TEST TONE
TEST TONE;;OFF
Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels.
Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu (see
page 61).
87
English
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2 SOUND MENU
3 INPUT MENU
Item Sub-items Features
A)LFE LEVEL
SP LFE;;;;;;;0
HP LFE;;;;;;;0
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby
Digital or DTS signals.
Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu (see
page 58).
B)D.RANGE
SP D.R;;;;;MAX
HP D.R;;;;;MAX
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS
signals.
Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu (see
page 58).
C)TONE CON FRQ
BASS FRQ.350Hz
TRBL FRQ.xxkHz
Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and
headphones.
Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu (see
page 59).
D)AUDIO OPTION
A.MUTE;;;;MUTE
A.DELAY;;;;;;0
PRch >SBch
Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.
Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu (see
page 60).
Item Sub-items Features
A)I/O ASSIGN
C.V[A] DVD
C.V[B] DTV
C.V[C]CBL/SAT
OUT(1)MD/TAPE
OUT(2) CD-R
IN (3) CD
IN (4) DVD
IN (5) DTV
IN (6)CBL/SAT
IN (7) CD
IN (8) DVD
IN (9)DVR/VCR2
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu (see
page 56).
B)INPUT TRIM
PHONO;;;;;;;0
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu (see
page 56).
C)INPUT MODE
>AUTO LAST
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
Corresponds to Input Mode in the GUI menu (see
page 67).
D)INPUT RENAME
DVD ._DVD
Changes the name of the input.
Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu (see
page 57).
E)MULTI CH IN
>6CH 8CH
DVD ->FRNT
Selects the number of audio channels input through
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu
(see page 57).
88
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
4 OPTION MENU
Item Sub-items Features
A)DISPLAY SET
DIMMER;;;;;;;0
WALL PAPER;;ON
SHORT MSG. ON
V CONV.;;;;;ON
Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.
Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu (see
page 65).
B)MEMORY GUARD
MEM.GUARD;;OFF
Locks the menu parameter settings.
Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu (see
page 67).
C)SURR.INI
PRESS DSP Key
Cinema DSP
Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound
field programs.
Corresponds to Surr.Initialize in the GUI menu (see
page 66).
D)ZONE SET
SP B;;;;;;MAIN
Customizes the Zone B parameters.
Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see
page 66).
E)ZONE2 SET
OUT VOL;;;VAR.
ZONE2 AMP;;EXT
Customizes the Zone 2 parameters (U.S.A., Canada,
U.K., Europe and Australia models only).
Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see
page 66).
F)ZONE3 SET
OUT VOL;;;VAR.
Customizes the Zone 3 parameters (U.S.A., Canada,
U.K., Europe and Australia models only).
Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see
page 66).
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
89
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live
instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of
the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these
reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,
and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room. The following
parameters are not always found in every program.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TOP on the remote control.
3 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h.
4 Select the desired sound field program, then
press h to access and adjust.
You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set
to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set
Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67).
Resetting parameters to the factory values
To reset all parameters
Use Surr.Initialize (see page 66).
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings
Note
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the
power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power
supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if
the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values
will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the
parameter value again.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
Vienna
Freiburg
Munich
Munich
Vienna
Freiburg
Init. Delay
Room Size
DSP Level
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
90
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
DSP Level (DSP level)
Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Description: Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect
level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control Range: –6 dB – +3 dB
Init. Delay (Initial delay)
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting
the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the
farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
Control Range: 1
99 ms
Room Size (Room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Time Time Time
Initial delay Initial delay Initial delay
Sound Source
Reflection Face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time
Time
Time
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound Source
91
English
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Liveness (Liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
Control Range: 0 – 10
Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of
the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround
channels are used.
Control Range: 1 – 49 ms
Sur.Room Size (Surround room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
SB Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back
sound field.
Control Range: 1 – 49 ms
SB Room Size (Surround back room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
SB Liveness (Surround back liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
Source Sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small Reflected
Sound
Large Reflected
Sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
92
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Rev.Time (Reverberation time)
Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to
decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range.
Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter
the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems.
Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 s
Rev.Delay (Reverberation delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control Range: 0 – 250 ms
Rev.Level (Reverberation level)
Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source Sound
Reverberation time
Reverberation time
Reverberation time
Sound Source
Short
Reverberation
Long
Reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early Reflections
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source Sound
Reverberation
Reverberation timeReverberation
delay
Time
Source Sound
Level
Reverberation level
Time
93
English
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift)
Function: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front
and center channel elements to the presence speakers.
Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 0.
For 7ch Stereo
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
Center Level (Center level)
Surround L Level (Surround left level)
Surround R Level (Surround right level)
Sur. Back Level (Surround back level)
Presence L Level (Presence left level)
Presence R Level (Presence right level)
For PLIIx Music and PLII Music
Panorama
Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: Off/On, initial setting is Off.
Dimension
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).
Center Width
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control Range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.
For Neo:6 Music
Center Image
Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control Range: 0.0 – 1.0
94
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Decode Type (Decoder type)
For MOVIE THEATER
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs.
Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6
For THX Cinema
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.
Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6
For SURROUND Standard
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard.
Choices: Pro Logic / PLII Movie / PLII Music / PLII Game / PLIIx Movie / PLIIx Music / PLIIx Game / Neo:6
Cinema / Neo:6 Music
For SURROUND Enhanced
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced.
Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6
TROUBLESHOOTING
95
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.
25
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
13–16
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
17–22
The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
The input mode is set to “DTS” or
“ANALOG”.
Set the input mode to “AUTO”.
39
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.
32
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
13
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
32
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
34
The input mode is set to “ANALOG”
while playing a source encoded with a
DTS signal.
Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
39
The signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component
e.g.: a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Turn on the video conversion function.
65
96
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
25
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
34
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
17
Incorrect balance settings in the GUI
menu.
Adjust the Speaker Level settings.
64
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on.
38
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
33
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
64
Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
61
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
33
No sound from the
surround speakers.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
64
Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
62
A monaural or stereo source is being
played with STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound
fields.
No sound from the
surround back
speakers.
Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select.
60
Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to
“None”, surround back speakers are automatically set
to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the
surround left and right speakers.
62
Surround Back is set to “None” in Speaker
Set.
Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or
“Large x2”.
62
No sound from the
subwoofer.
Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is being played.
Select “SWFR” or “Both”.
63
Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front”
when a 2-channel source is being played.
Select “Both”.
63
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
97
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator on
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.
The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
39
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
21
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.
21
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
17–21
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
17–21
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. Select “Free”.
67
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears on the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
13
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio-
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or
radio-frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and
then turn it back on.
98
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
23
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
23
Use the manual tuning method.
40
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
41
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
99
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly.
70
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer.
70
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
72
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
3
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
72
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
77
GLOSSARY
100
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. It
provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels
(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.
An additional channel especially for bass effects, called
LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the
system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to
minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range
channels and the precise sound orientation generated
using digital sound processing provide listeners with a
previously unheard of excitement and realism.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using
a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital
EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with
Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,
you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving
sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “fly-
around” effects.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.
This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2
front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2
surround left and right channels (instead of only 1
surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology).
Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel
sources in addition to the Movie mode.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or
7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-
channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a
Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD-video.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,
left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus
an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-
channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that
enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround
back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-
range channels with higher separation comparable to
digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;
“Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema
mode” for movies.
GLOSSARY
Audio formats
101
English
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and
audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room
of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects without any surround speakers by using
virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
Sound field programs
102
GLOSSARY
ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering
studios.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies
established by the world-renowned film production
company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film
soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home
theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director
intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back
in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions.
This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto
Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for
playback in a small home theatre environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX
indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in
Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
Adaptive decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers
help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but
in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This
can make the surround speakers sound like headphones
that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround
sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time
and phase relationship with respect to the other surround
channel. This expands the listening position and creates –
with only two speakers – the same spacious surround
experience as in a movie theatre.
Re-equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively
bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment
in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be
played back in large movie theatres using very different
professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the
correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
Timbre matching
The human ear changes our perception of sound
depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a
movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so
that the surround information is all around you. In a home
theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of
your head. The timbre matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they
more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound
coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless
panning between the front and surround speakers.
Audio information
103
English
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
THX Select
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select
certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that
the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you
superb performance for many years to come. THX Select
requirements cover every aspect of the product including
power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and
operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the
digital and analog domain.
THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint
development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are
able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added
during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in
addition to the currently available front left, front center,
front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer
channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings
more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization
than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology
can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A
list of available DVD software titles encoded with this
technology can be found at www.thx.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX
Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,
faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the THX Surround EX
mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the
information delivered to the Surround Back channel will
be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing
depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of
the individual listener.
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Video signal information
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
104
This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the
Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.
Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.
Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Figure 2
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
Gain
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Band 1
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Gain
Frequency
Band 1
Band 2
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Original frequency
characteristic
SPECIFICATIONS
105
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ..................................... 130 W
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[Australia, China, Asia, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ..........................................................180 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General
models]
8/6/4/2 ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W
DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 .........................................................190 W
IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 .......................................................140 W
Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ................................................... 140 or more
Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02%
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04%
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[U.K., Europe and Australia models] ....................................81 dB
[Other models].......................................................................86 dB
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R .................................................. 100 dB
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB
CD (5.1 k terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB
Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency..................................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................3.5 kHz
Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100
Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 k
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 k
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 k
Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k
PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT
[U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and
Australia models].................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 k
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC
Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Asia model]..................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... 0.2 W
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ................................. 0.33 W
[Other models] .................................................................. 0.15 W
•AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”)
Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs)
SPECIFICATIONS

Documenttranscriptie

GB MITSUBISHI REOC REPLAYTV REX ROADSTAR 0375 0641, 0643 0068 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI THOMAS THOMSON 0027 0027 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 RX-V2500 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WD64260 RX-V2500 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER'S MANUAL MODE D'EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model .............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................48 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 48 For music sources .................................................... 51 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 8 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................52 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 52 SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................53 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................69 Before connecting components................................ 17 Connecting video components................................. 18 Connecting audio components................................. 21 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 23 Connecting the power cable..................................... 24 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25 Turning on the power............................................... 25 Control area ............................................................. 69 Setting remote control codes ................................... 70 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) ................................................................. 72 Changing source names in the display window....... 74 Using the Macro feature .......................................... 75 Clearing function sets .............................................. 77 Clearing individual functions .................................. 78 Controlling each component.................................... 80 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26 Introduction.............................................................. 26 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26 Starting the setup ..................................................... 27 Confirming the results ............................................. 29 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17 SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12 BASIC OPERATION Speaker placement ................................................... 12 Speaker connections ................................................ 13 Changing parameter settings ................................... 55 Input Select .............................................................. 56 Manual setup: Sound ............................................... 58 Manual setup: Basic................................................. 61 Manual setup: Option .............................................. 65 System Memory....................................................... 67 PREPARATION ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) .....................81 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 81 Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 82 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32 Advanced setup menu.............................................. 84 Front panel display system options menu................ 85 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TUNING ................................................................ 40 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......89 Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 40 Presetting stations .................................................... 41 Selecting preset stations........................................... 43 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43 Receiving RDS stations ........................................... 44 Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 44 PTY SEEK function ................................................ 45 EON function........................................................... 46 What is a sound field? ............................................. 89 Changing parameter settings ................................... 89 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................90 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................95 GLOSSARY.........................................................100 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECORDING ....................................................... 47 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 32 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 33 Additional operations............................................... 34 Selecting input modes.............................................. 39 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................84 Audio formats ........................................................ 100 Sound field programs............................................. 101 Audio information ................................................. 102 Video signal information ....................................... 103 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION .............................................104 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................105 English 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Surround: 130 W + 130 W Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi channel input ◆ Short message function ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and learning/macro capability ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX Select ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability (U.K. and Europe models only) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 2 GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03) Power cable Speaker terminal wrench Optimizer microphone 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) AM loop antenna SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea, Asia and General models) SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV Indoor FM antenna (U.K., Europe and Australia models) A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Installing batteries in the remote controls 2 1 3 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. • Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash, or its light or display window become dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English 1 Notes on batteries 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (U.S.A. model) VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE TUNER EDIT MAN'L/AUTO FM SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO PROGRAM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 MD/TAPE CD-R AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR/ VCR2 YPAO EFFECT REC OUT/ZONE 2 A B C D OPTIMIZER MIC E F G VIDEO AUX PHONES H I J K L RDS MODE /FREQ EON M PTY SEEK MODE O P N START Q R (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 6 to 7 second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 3 PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when turned on (see page 37). 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. 4 6 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO” indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off). 9 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. A SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the corresponding button is pressed. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39). D REC OUT/ZONE 2 (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source you are listening to or watching in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the source you record are always identical REC OUT (other models) Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder independent of the source you are listening to or watching. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. E OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 26). F A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). G PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. H PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the front left and right channels. K ZONE ON/OFF (ZONE 2) (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Turns Zone 2 on or to the standby mode (see page 83). L TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 34). M PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). INTRODUCTION B MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). N STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. ■ U.K. and Europe models only O RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data service) and/or the frequency display mode (see page 44). P EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see page 46). Q PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). R PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. I VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from an external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. English J ZONE ON/OFF (MAIN) (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Turns the main unit on or to the standby mode (see page 83). To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 69. 1 2 3 E POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 SELECT 5 6 7 8 PRESET + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV MUTE A B TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN F G H 6 LIGHT button Press to light up remote control buttons and display window. I 7 A/B/C/D/E Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode. 8 TOP Selects the graphical user interface (GUI) mode for your video monitor. J K L 9 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI menu items. M 0 RETURN Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel display menu mode. TV A/B/C/D/E 9 0 AMP + DISPLAY N O P Q R A Sound field program/Numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when this unit is in tuner mode. EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. B MEMORY 1/2 Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO settings or additional preset stations (see page 68). S C MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. t X MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP C D OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. 5 PRESET +/– Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner mode. SYSTEM POWER 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. U V W D MACRO Use to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see page 75). E STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. F SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. G INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39). 2 Transmission indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. H SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. 6 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS W LEARN Used to set up the remote control code or program functions from other remote controls (see page 72). J SELECT k / n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. ■ U.K. and Europe models only K VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. FREQ/RDS Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display (see page 44). L AMP/SOURCE/TV Selects the component you want to control with the remote control. AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit. SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component selected with an input selector button. TV: Set to this position to operate the television. To set the remote control codes for components, see page 70. M MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. N PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37). X RDS tuning buttons (Available when this unit is in tuner mode) INTRODUCTION I MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see page 46). PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). O EXIT Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode. P NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 37). Q DISPLAY Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode. R STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. S EXTD. SUR Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software. T SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the corresponding button is pressed. U RE-NAME Used to change the input source name in the display window (see page 74). English V CLEAR Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn, macro and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 77). 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD DTV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER EDIT CD MAN'L/AUTO FM SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO TONE CONTROL AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC Approximately 6 m (20 feet) EFFECT VIDEO AUX PHONES 30 30 ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperature – dusty places 8 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display V–AUX MATRIX DISCRETE DIGITAL PL PL EX PL x DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 NIGHT VIRTUAL 96 24 THX PCM 0 A 3 4 CBL/SAT SP AB 5 DTV 6 DVD MD/TAPE 7 8 CD–R CD TUNER PHONO PS PTY RT CT EON AUTO STEREO YPAO PTY HOLD MEMORY TUNED HiFi DSP SILENT CINEMA ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 SLEEP B 9 ft mS dB C D E F G P (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and H dB MUTE VOLUME 96/24 L C R INTRODUCTION 2 1 LFE SL SB SR I J K L M NO Q (U.K. and Europe models only) Australia models only) 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. A PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 2 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. B SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Presence DSP sound field Left surround DSP sound field Listening position Right surround DSP sound field Surround/surround back DSP sound field 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. C VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 38). D Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. E SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. 5 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. F SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 34). 6 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. G Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 7 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 9 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. I MEMORY indicator Blinks to show a station can be stored. J TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. K MUTE indicator Blinks while the MUTE function is on. English 0 THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. H HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. O Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 26) or Speaker Level setting (page 64). P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on. Q RDS indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL TUNER 3 VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO MD/TAPE 4 AUDIO 7 AUDIO L R 8 REMOTE L R 9 0 CONTROL OUT 2 1 IN (PLAY) DVD FM ANT 56 INTRODUCTION 1 1 2 AC IN IN OUT IN OUT +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE CD-R 75Ω UNBAL. R DTV OUT (REC) IN (PLAY) CD GND – A – + + – B – + + – – + + L RS-232C CBL/ SAT GND FRONT CD-R CENTER DVD IN AM ANT – + OUT (REC) VCR 1 DTV OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR CBL/SAT AC OUTLETS FRONT CD PHONO R SURROUND IN SURROUND L R DVD L L R DVR/VCR 2 FRONT (6 ch)/ SB (8 ch) DTV OUT L R SUB WOOFER CENTER + CD CBL/ SAT SURROUND ZONE 2 R + – – + SINGLE (SB) DVD L – MONITOR OUT R DVR/ VCR 2 COAXIAL ZONE 3 MONITOR DIGITAL INPUT OUTPUT A B SUB WOOFER L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 CENTER MULTI CH INPUT (U.S.A. model) C 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 21 for details. 2 Antenna terminals See page 23 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 20 for connection information. 4 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 5 Speaker terminal wrench hook Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use. 6 RS-232C terminal (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. Consult you dealer for details. 7 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 81 for details. E F 0 AC INLET Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 24). A DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details. B ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 81 for details. C MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 19 for connection information. D PRE OUT jacks See page 22 for connection information. E Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. F PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 13 for connection information. English 8 CONTROL OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) These are control expansion terminals for commercial use. D 9 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 24). 11 SPEAKER SETUP + SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below. PL PR C FR FL 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. SR Subwoofer SBL SBR The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. More than 30 cm (12 in) . 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) y The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended by the ITU-R (see page 102). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX. Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 12 Presence speakers (PR and PL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Note Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 60). SPEAKER SETUP ■ Di-pole speaker layout Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 25). If you will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for speaker impedance. • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is disconnected from the power source. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. PREPARATION SL Speaker connections A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 10 mm (3/8 in) 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Loosen the knob. The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for loosening or tightening knobs. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. English 13 SPEAKER SETUP 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Speaker terminal wrench 5 4 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 1 3 2 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. ■ Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 14 SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 7 3 8 6 5 Front speakers (A) Right Left Speaker layout Center speaker 1 2 R 3 – A – + + – B – + + – – + + FRONT Front speakers (B) 4 PREPARATION Subwoofer with built-in amplifier L CENTER – + FRONT SURROUND L R R SURROUND L L R L R SUB WOOFER CENTER + R + – – + L SINGLE (SB) R – L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS PRESENCE/ZONE 2 SINGLE (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 60). • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. English 15 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals ■ CENTER terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the FRONT A or B terminals. Connect a center speaker to these terminals. Note ■ SUBWOOFER jack The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display. ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. Bi-wired connection Note (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see page 66). + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R This unit 16 L CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 65), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. PREPARATION ■ Cable indications ■ Video jacks S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. S VIDEO VIDEO Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 65) This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. English 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Coaxial out Audio out Optical out C DVD player Video out R O VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R L DVD Video monitor DVD Video in COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR DVD DVD MONITOR OUT MONITOR (U.S.A. model) 18 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign: Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input AUDIO R SURROUND SURROUND PREPARATION FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) AUDIO L IN (PLAY) R L DVD MD/TAPE DTV SUB WOOFER CENTER SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT OUT (REC) IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT CD-R IN R L Subwoofer out R L R L VCR 1 R L CD Center out Center out Multi-format player/ Front External decoder out Subwoofer out Surround out Surround back out IN DVR/ VCR 2 Multi-format player/ Surround out R External decoder L Front out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. English 19 CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Audio out Cable TV or satellite tuner Video out O VIDEO R L R L AUDIO CBL/ SAT IN VCR 1 OUT COMPONENT VIDEO CBL/SAT DTV CBL/ SAT DVR/ VCR 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) R C Video in Video out L Audio in DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or camcorder, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX L R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-video out 20 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components O Optical in Optical in MD recorder or tape deck CD recorder Audio in Audio out L R L Audio in R L R PREPARATION R O Audio out L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE L IN (PLAY) MD/TAPE CD-R OUT (REC) GND CD IN (PLAY) CD-R OUT (REC) CD PHONO CD DIGITAL INPUT R (U.S.A. model) L R Audio out O C L Audio out Optical out Coaxial out CD player GND Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. English 21 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set to “Zone B” (see page 66), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. FRONT 1 L R SURROUND 2 L R SUB WOOFER CENTER 3 4 5 SINGLE (SB) R L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the correct speakers. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 61). 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Indoor FM antenna (included) 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. AM loop antenna (included) Notes TUNER 75Ω UNBAL. GND AM ANT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR DVD DTV • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) CBL/ SAT MONITOR OUT Ground (GND terminal) 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 PREPARATION FM ANT Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 3 4 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the lead wire and remove it. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. Unit: mm (in) Lead wire Clamp Clamp Insert the wire into the slot 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 5 Snap the cover into place. English 23 CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an AC wall outlet. CAUTION AC OUTLETS Do not use other AC power cables. Use the one provided. Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (U.S.A. model) U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W VOLTAGE SELECTOR ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model....... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ........................... AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz ■ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. (General model) 24 CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. 1 Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.–8ΩMIN” appears on the front panel display. 1 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE MEMORY FM/AM PROGRAM CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD SILENT CINEMA AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO EFFECT REC OUT /ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT PHONES VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) SP IMP.-8 MIN 2 SYSTEM Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the impedance of your speakers. You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms. POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 PREPARATION SPEAKERS A SELECT 3 AMP Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. Note + 1 Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced menu (see page 84). + + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote controls) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM CAUTION POWER STANDBY /ON If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms before turning on the power. Front panel 2 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Note Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control) to enter the standby mode. English 25 AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV Notes CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 30. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. Wiring Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Distance Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Size Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. Equalizing Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. Level Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 26 REC OUT /ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 4 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu, then press h. y Information If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer 1 2 Switch on this unit and video monitor. Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring, Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then press h. Wiring Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. PREPARATION 5 Skip Wiring Skip Check Distance Check Distance Size Size Equalizing Wiring Distance Distance Skip Size Skip Size Check Equalizing Check: Natural Level Check: Flat Equalizing Check: Front Level AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE Size TV Equalizing Skip Level Check Stereo/Surround Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option 6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select: Check System Memory Skip To automatically check and adjust the selected item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. y 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup, then press h. ENTER When using THX speakers, select Skip for Size and make sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set (page 61) and that “80Hz (THX)” is selected in Bass Cross Over (page 63). ENTER Input Select Information Auto Setup Setup Menu System Memory Setup Type Audio Info. Start English Manual Setup 27 AUTO SETUP For Equalizing, press k / n to select: Skip To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat” setting sounds a little harsh. Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. 7 Once you have selected the desired setting, press l to move back to Setup Menu. Information 8 Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size Press n to select Setup Type, then select: Auto To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. Step Information Setup Menu 28 Setup Type Auto Start Step 9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER. Loud test tones are output from each speaker and “Measuring” appears during the auto setup procedure. Setup Menu Setup Type Start Press ENTER • To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode, press k to retry the procedure, l to cancel auto setup. • If an error message appears during testing, refer to “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto setup procedure. AUTO SETUP Confirming the results If you set Setup Type to Step. The results are displayed individually after each analysis. You can confirm the results of each analysis. Distance If you set Setup Type to Auto. The results are displayed after all items have been analysed. Setup Menu Setup Type Start Size Retry Detail Next Equalizing Level Result Retry Exit Detail Setup PREPARATION • Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next menu item. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. Measurement Over Successfully • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. Exit After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item are displayed. • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. y If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu, press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust, then press ENTER. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external amplifier. • In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. English 29 AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. • Select at least one setup menu item. Memory Guard! This setting is protected. • Remove the protection setting for auto setup (see page 67). During auto setup Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. Error message Cause Remedy E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B. • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E02:No Surr. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners, or move them away from this unit. E06:Check Surr. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround back speaker(s). E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled because a setting that affects auto setup was changed during the procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. • Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure again. 30 AUTO SETUP After auto setup The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. Warning message Cause Remedy W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when they are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections. W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • • • • W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the measurement results of wiring (only occurs when the wiring measurement procedure is skipped). • Check the speaker connections. PREPARATION Readjust the speaker installation. Check the speaker connections. Use speakers of similar quality. Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. English 31 PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 1 3 4 6 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. SPEAKERS A B A SPEAKERS B or +10 ENT. VOLUME Front panel INPUT Remote control PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON When bi-wiring, select both A and B. SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VCR 1 S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX 4 (U.S.A. model) 3 7 1 TV MUTE SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN TV INPUT EXIT MENU MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AMP + + SOURCE TV VOL – CH VOL – – 1 TV INPUT 1 MUSIC ENTERTAIN Front panel MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 7 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 FREQ/RDS EON ENT. 7 3 Remote control The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME TV V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 EXIT TITLE MENU CBL/SAT DTV DVD DVD PURE DIRECT Press STANDBY/ON (set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP then press SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. Selected input source Front panel CD TUNER AMP PHONO dB VOLUME AUTO L R Input mode Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or + SYSTEM POWER or SOURCE VOL – TV Remote control Front panel 32 CD–R 5 STANDBY /ON 2 MD/TAPE SP A MUTE TOP DVD AUDIO A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE CD-R DVR/VCR2 STRAIGHT DISPLAY STEREO + MD/TAPE VCR 1 DTV NIGHT SELECT 6 CBL/SAT V-AUX or EFFECT CBL/SAT DTV MULTI CH IN TUNER PURE DIRECT ENTER V-AUX CD PHONO INPUT MUTE TOP TITLE RETURN 4 Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Remote control PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 48 for details about sound field programs. Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT PROGRAM or STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 7 8 THX 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT M MODE CBL/SAT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD VCR 1 SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO 9 Front panel 0 A SPEAKERS B +10 REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX ENT. Remote control (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Note When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX recommendation). Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM DialNorm;;+4dB DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD HiFi DSP Hall in Munich TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L BASIC OPERATION V–AUX R Program name English 33 PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation Additional operations AMP + + + CH VOL – – SOURCE TV VOL – AMP/SOURCE/TV ■ To adjust the tone TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MOVIE Sound field program buttons PROGRAM A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 AMP SOURCE TV V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE MOVIE Notes A SPEAKERS B +10 CD–R TONE CONTROL You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. ENT. CD HiFi DSP Hall in Munich TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If headphones are connected to this unit, the TONE CONTROL setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones (see page 59). ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. MUTE The MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. y You can adjust the muting level (see page 60). ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 34 PLAYBACK ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. Off (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. BASIC OPERATION ■ Enjoying multi-channel software in 6.1/7.1 channel surround Decoders (select with l / h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. y If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multichannel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 62), the surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD. SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback. • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is pressed in the following cases: – When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 62). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 62). • “PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 62). EXTD. SUR 8 To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed. Auto (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. Notes English 35 PLAYBACK ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR. ENHANCED programs. 6 Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs. THX 4 or 5 Press SELECT on the remote control to select the decoder. SELECT 7 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. When you select the SUR. STANDARD program PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. 36 PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. STANDARD MOVIE When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE THEATER or THX program Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. y • You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 89). • You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message display. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 62). PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The button lights up and the front panel display automatically goes out. ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. NIGHT PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT AUDIO or Remote control Front panel Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 34) and GUI menu (page 53) settings are not effective. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the short message – adjusting GUI menu parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. BASIC OPERATION To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press l / h to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. ENTER Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. English 37 PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. STEREO PROGRAM or Front panel MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine images from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Audio sources Remote control 2ch Stereo PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources Note You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or Both is selected in Bass Out. ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 38 Note If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. PLAYBACK ■ Displaying information about the input source Selecting input modes You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signal you want to use. 1 Select the input source. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD INPUT or 1 Press TOP on the remote control. 2 Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info. The following information appears in the display. Auto Setup System Memory Front panel 2 Remote control Audio Info Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. SYSTEM Front panel V–AUX DVR/VCR2 POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN Remote control VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A DVD AUTO CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Input mode AUTO DTS ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “?” appears. Channel Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Dialogue Dialogue normalization information for Dolby Digital signals. Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “– – –” appears. Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. BASIC OPERATION or POWER Analog --2/0/----------- Format TRANSMIT INPUT MODE Format Sampling Channel Bitrate Dialogue Flag1 Flag2 * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 67). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note English If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. 39 TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning PRESET/ TUNING PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R YPAO (U.S.A. model) 1 OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT PHONES MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU AUTO TUNED If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 REC OUT /ZONE 2 DVD PROGRAM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO DTV ■ Manual tuning ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE CD–R TUNER CBL/SAT SP A When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT SPEAKERS VCR 1 A~~AM~1530 kHz 3 1 A Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. VIDEO AUX 4 32 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. FM/AM or PRESET /TUNING 3 EDIT Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE 3 AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING EDIT 40 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU AUTO A~~AM~1440 kHz VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU SP A A~~AM~1440 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to PRESET/ TUNING continue searching. TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. VOLUME Automatic preset tuning options INPUT STANDBY /ON D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD VCR 1 SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 PHONES VIDEO AUX 1 32 (U.S.A. model) 1 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. BASIC OPERATION You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. PURE DIRECT SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 41 TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. 4 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES 3 4 VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 2,5 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 1 C3:AM Tune into a station. See page 40 for tuning instructions. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE 5 CD–R CD SP A TUNER TUNED A :AM 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. TUNER 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C3:AM MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM CD MEMORY TUNED DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER TUNED 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes 6 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C :AM 42 DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT VOLUME STANDBY /ON INPUT PURE DIRECT SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS A STANDBY /ON CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VCR 1 AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE VIDEO AUX B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS A CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VCR 1 AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT PHONES VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 1 2 (U.S.A. model) 1,3 1,3 2,4 2 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL 1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. SOURCE – – – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE When performing this operation with the remote control, first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. PRESET /TUNING CR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E or TV INPUT Front panel Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Remote control V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/– on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. PRESET /TUNING EDIT + or TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET PRESET/ TUNING CD MEMORY TUNED A5:FM 90.6 MHz 4 TUNER MEMORY TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz EDIT 3 CD BASIC OPERATION 1 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A EDIT E1-A5 CH – Front panel CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER English VCR 1 Remote control TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz 43 TUNING Receiving RDS stations RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various RDS data such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks) when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. Changing the RDS mode Four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up in the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/ FREQ (or FREQ/RDS on the remote control) repeatedly to display the various RDS data offered by the transmitting station as shown below. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: RDS MODE /FREQ PS The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: Front panel PTY There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pop ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music or FREQ/RDS RT CT Remote control ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data flow is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): See “EON function” on page 46. 44 Frequency display mode y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. Notes • Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until an RDS indicator lights up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has not finished receiving all of the RDS data from the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • This unit cannot utilize the RDS data source if the signal received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data may not be received under poor reception conditions. In such cases, press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this will change the reception mode to manual, RDS data may be displayed when you change the display to RDS mode. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front panel display. TUNING PTY SEEK function 2 If you select the desired program type, this unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/– on the remote control) to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears on the front panel display. PRESET/ TUNING VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON Front panel SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE RDS MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK PROGRAM CD–R CBL/SAT VCR 1 TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD SILENT CINEMA MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R START TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT or OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX PRESET + (Europe model) 1 2 CH 3 – Remote control PRESET AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE EXIT MENU 2 3 PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON REC Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up on the front panel display while searching for stations. 8 BASIC OPERATION TOP TITLE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START PTY SEEK 1, 3 MODE START DISC SKIP Front panel y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” blinks in the front panel display. PTY SEEK MODE START Front panel or MODE PTY SEEK START or PTY HOLD Lights up MODE PTY SEEK START Remote control To cancel searching, press PTY SEEK START again. • The unit stops searching when it finds a station broadcasting the selected type of program. • If the found station is not the one you desire one, press PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes searching for another station broadcasting the same type of program. Blinks Remote control To exit from the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE again. English 45 TUNING EON function This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast the selected type of program and switches from the station currently being received to the new station when the broadcast starts. Note This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front panel display. 1 Check that the EON indicator is lit on the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another RDS station so that the EON indicator lights up. 2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name appears on the front panel display. RDS MODE /FREQ EON Front panel or EON Remote control • If a preset RDS station type starts broadcasting the selected type of program, the unit automatically switches from the program being received to that program. (EON indicator flashes.) • When broadcasting of the selected program ends, the unit returns to the previous station (or another program on the same station). ■ To cancel this function Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is shown on the front panel display. 46 RECORDING RECORDING You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT control to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE RDS MODE /FREQ ZONE ON/OFF MAINPTY SEEK ZONE 2 EON PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS A CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD VCR 1 SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R START TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 1 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT. • To record the current input source that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE. SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 • To record a source other than the one that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to the source you want to record. SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 After this setting, you can change the source you are listening to and/or watching without effecting the recording by rotating INPUT (or pressing one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. Notes • The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) are always the same. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, Speaker Level (page 64) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. English 3 • To record audio and video from different sources, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a video source first then select an audio source (see page 38). • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. BASIC OPERATION 1 y 47 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 39) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. ENTERTAINMENT: TV Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT: Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT: Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. THX: THX Cinema THX processing for any multi-channel sources (including DTS-ES). 48 Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96 kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS 96/24: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS 96 kHz/ 24-bit DTS sources. DTS 96/24 ES: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. Sources MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS THX: THX Surr. EX THX processing for any 5.1 channel source. English 49 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources. PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for movie software. PLII Movie: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic II) for movie software. PLIIx Game: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. PLII Game: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. Neo:6 Cinema: SUR. STANDARD DTS processing for movie software. Neo:6 Cinema: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (DTS Neo:6) for movie software. Sources 2-CH 50 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features 2 (left and right) channel playback. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC: Hall in Munich HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. MUSIC: Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC: Freiburg HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. MUSIC: The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. MUSIC: The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. MUSIC: Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. MUSIC: Classic/Opera CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by highenergy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PLII Music: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. Neo:6 Music: SUR. STANDARD DTS processing for music software. MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS STEREO: 2ch Stereo Sources MULTI 2-CH English 51 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer SYSTEM POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD POWER 2 SELECT 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP 120 min SLEEP OFF V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SLEEP SLEEP 90 min SLEEP 30 min DVD MD/TAPE SLEEP 60 min CD–R CD TUNER SP A SLEEP PHONO dB VOLUME SLEEP 120min L R The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER SP A SLEEP 52 SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. TRANSMIT POWER Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. Hall in Munich PHONO dB VOLUME L R SYSTEM OPTIONS SYSTEM OPTIONS You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround) Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 89). ■ Input Select (Input select) Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack. Item Features Page I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 56 Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 56 Rename Changes the name of the input. 57 Multi CH Assign Selects the number of audio channels input through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks 57 ■ Manual Setup (Manual setup) Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings. Sound (Sound) Use to manually adjust the sound parameters. Item Features Page LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 59 Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. 59 Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. 60 Item Features Page Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. 61 Speaker Set Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 61 Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 64 Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 64 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic (Basic) Use to quickly setup basic system parameters. English 53 SYSTEM OPTIONS Option (Option) Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item Features Page Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. 65 Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings. 66 Surr.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. 66 Input Mode Selects the initial input mode of the source. 67 Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings. 67 ■ Auto Setup (Auto setup) Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26). ■ System Memory (System memory) Use to save and recall various settings (see page 67). ■ Audio Info. (Audio signal information) Use to check audio signal information (see page 39). 54 SYSTEM OPTIONS Changing parameter settings 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz AMP + + + CH VOL – – SOURCE TV VOL – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 2 TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN 6 3-5 100Hz DISPLAY EFFECT 5 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then press h to enter the selected menu. Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 100Hz Test Tone Speaker Set Front Speaker Distance Center Speaker Level Surround 6 Press EXIT. y If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item. Notes Front Center Large Surround Small Surround Back None Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ADVANCED OPERATION Presence • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67). English 55 SYSTEM OPTIONS Input Select Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input to each jack. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. Example 2: To clear a jack assignment. 1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD, etc.). 2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment (Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or Component Video). 3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the assignment. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Input Select, then press h. CD-R Stereo/Surround DVD Manual Setup DTV Auto Setup 4 MD/TAPE Input Select CBL/SAT Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then press h to access and adjust. ■ I/O Assignment (Input / output assignment) You can assign the digital audio input/output and component video jacks to other components if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component using INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > I/O Assignment > Example 1: To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input. 1) Select Input Select, then select DVD. 2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select 7 CD. 56 I/O Assignment Optical Output Volume Trim Optical Input Rename Coaxial Input y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. ■ Volume Trim (Volume trim) Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Volume Trim > Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Rename (Rename) Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the GUI and front panel display. (DVD is used as the source component in the following example.) Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or character you want to edit. ■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment) Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign Volume Trim Multi CH Assign I/O Assignment Rename DVD OK 3 4 RESET Press ENTER to select a character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK). Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press ENTER to switch between character types: CAPITAL A to Z, space SMALL a to z, space FIGURE 0 to 9, space MARK !, #, %, &, etc. • Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER when complete. Input Channels This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch Note If Zone2 Amplifier (page 66) is set to “Internal”, no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. Front Input If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select analog jacks to which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). ADVANCED OPERATION 5 Front Input CAPITAL Volume Trim Input Channels English 57 SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual setup: Sound Note Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters. Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 1 ■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range) Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Manual Setup, then press h. Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range > Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN (minimum) LFE Level 4 5 Dynamic Range Speaker MAX Sound Parametric EQ Headphone STD Basic Tone Control Option Audio Option MIN Speaker (Speaker) Select to adjust the speaker compression. Select Sound, then press h. Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. ■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level) Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level > Choices: –20 to 0 (dB) Speaker 0.0dB Headphone Speaker (Speaker) Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone (Headphone) Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 58 Headphone (Headphone) Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. • Select “STD” for general use. • Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the PEQ for any speaker. 4 Press n EDIT and press ENTER to access the edit window. LFE Level Dynamic Range Parametric EQ Test Tone Tone Control Front L Audio Option Front R Test Tone Band Gain Freq. Q #1 0.0dB 125.0Hz 1.000 Front L Front R Center 1 2 Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker you want to adjust. • Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker. • Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the presence right speaker. Press h to access the settings window. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the results. y If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER. 6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the settings window. y • If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic equalizer. • For more information on the parametric equalizer, see “PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 104. ■ Tone Control (Tone control) Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your speakers and headphones. Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control > Control (Tone control) Choices: Defeat, Speaker, Headphone ADVANCED OPERATION PARAM Test Tone The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted. • Press l / h to adjust the parameter. • Press k / n to adjust the Gain. • Press ENTER to exit the edit window. RESET EDIT EXIT Band / Gain Front L Front R Center Defeat Control Speaker Bass Headphone Treble 3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press ENTER to select a parameter from Band (band), Freq (frequency) or Q (Q factor). • Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any adjustments. • Select “Speaker” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers. • Select “Headphone” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones. English 59 SYSTEM OPTIONS Bass (Bass control) Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB You can adjust three frequency bands: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz. Speaker Freq : 125Hz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble Audio Delay (Audio delay) Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) Muting Type 0ms Audio Delay +6 PR/PB Select +0 +6 y Treble (Treble control) Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB You can adjust three frequency bands: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz. Speaker Freq : 3.5kHz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble +6 This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). PR/SB Select (Presence speakers / surround back speakers select) Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker set when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: Presence, Surround Back +0 +6 Muting Type y Audio Delay Presence PR/SB Select Surround Back This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Note TONE CONTROL is not effective when: – The THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected. – MULTI CH INPUT is selected. ■ Audio Option (Audio option) Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings. Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option > Muting Type (Muting type) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: Full, –20dB Muting Type Full Audio Delay -20dB PR/SB Select • Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. 60 • Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual setup: Basic Note Use this menu to set up basic system parameters. Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case, make sure no children are present in the listening room. 1 ■ Speaker Set (Speaker set) Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set > AMP SOURCE y TV If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Manual Setup, then press h. Note Set any THX speakers to Small. Sound Test Tone Basic Speaker Set Option Speaker Distance Speaker Level Front (Front speakers) Choices: Large, Small Large Front Small Center Surround 4 5 Select Basic, then press h. Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. • Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. • You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup procedure (see page 26). • Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. Center (Center speaker) Choices: Large, Small, None ■ Test Tone (Test tone) Front Large Center Small Surround None ADVANCED OPERATION Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone > Choices: Off, On Surround Back Test Tone Off Speaker Set On Speaker Distance y English • If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). • Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. 61 SYSTEM OPTIONS Surround (Surround left/right speakers) Choices: Large, Small, None Front Surround Back (Surround back left/right speakers) Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2, None Center Large Surround Small Center Large x1 None Surround Small x1 Surround Back Small x2 Presence Large x2 Bass Out None Surround Back Presence • Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers. This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 38) and automatically sets the surround back speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”. • Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select “None” if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals. 62 SYSTEM OPTIONS Presence (Presence speakers) Choices: None, Yes Surround Surround Back Presence None Bass Out Yes Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over) Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX) Bass Cross Over • Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers. This unit directs all presence channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers. Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 100Hz Note When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 66), Presence is automatically set to “None”. Bass Out (Bass out) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These lowfrequency signals can be directed to both front left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be used for both stereo reproduction and sound field programs). Choices: Both, SWFR, Front THX recommendation: SWFR SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase) If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your subwoofer. Choices: Normal, Reverse Bass Out Bass Cross Over SWFR Phase Normal Reverse Surround Back Presence Both Bass Out SWFR Bass Cross Over Front y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). SWFR Phase ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer. Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both the subwoofer and front channels, and all other lowfrequency signals are directed in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the front speakers (even if you have previously set Front to Small in Speaker Set). English 63 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance) Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance > Notes • You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the distance in Surround Back L. ■ Speaker Level (Speaker level) Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left speakers and each speaker selected in Speaker Set (see page 61). Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level Test Tone Subwoofer Speaker Set Unit Speaker Distance Front L Speaker Set Speaker Level Front R Speaker Distance Subwoofer Center Speaker Level Front L Presence R Front R Unit (Unit) Choices: Meter, Feet Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet Other models: Meter • Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters. • Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet. Presence R Subwoofer Unit Meter Front L Feet Front R Speaker Distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. • Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 64 Center Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB • Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and presence left speakers. • Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and presence right speakers. • Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. y • To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use the Test Tone (see page 61). • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Notes • You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance in Surround Back L. SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual setup: Option This menu adjusts the optional system settings. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. Video Conv. (Video conversion) Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” not to convert any signals. • Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. y 3 Select Manual Setup, then press h. When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv. to “Off”. 4 Select Option then press h. Notes Sound Display Basic Multi Zone Option Surr.Initialize Input Mode Memory Guard 5 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. 6 When finished adjusting parameters, press ENTER. ■ Display (Display) Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays. Manual Setup > Option > Display > Video Conv. Display Short Message Multi Zone Position Surr.Initialize Wall Paper Dimmer (Dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 Short Message (Short message) Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” to turn off the short message display. • Select “On” to turn on the short message display. Notes • The short message display may not display properly depending on the type of input signal and video monitor used. • If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not displayed even if “On” is selected. Position (Position) Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI display. Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right) • Press k to raise the position of the GUI display. • Press n to lower the position of the GUI display. • Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the right. • Press l to shift the position of the GUI display to the left. ADVANCED OPERATION Dimmer • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Wall Paper (Wallpaper) Use this feature to select the background when no image is input from an external source. If you do not want to display the background, select None. Choices: None, Yes, Gray Back Note y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 65 English If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if “Yes” is selected. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Multi Zone (Multi zone) Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B settings. Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone > Display Speaker B Multi Zone Zone2 Amplifier Surr.Initialize Zone2 Volume Input Mode Zone 3 Volume Speaker B (Speaker B) Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: Main, ZoneB • Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select “ZoneB” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier) Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified. Choices: Internal, External, None • Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. • Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2 feature. Notes • When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting automatically switches to “None”. • When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting automatically switches to “Variable”. Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically set to “Variable”. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). ■ Surr.Initialize (Surround initialize) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within sound field program groups. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in blue. Manual Setup > Option > Surr.Initialize Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All Display STEREO Multi Zone MUSIC Surr.Initialize ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER Input Mode SURROUND Memory Guard All • Press k / n to select the sound field program you want to initialize, then press ENTER. • Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field program parameters. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Note Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory Guard is set to “Guard” (see page 67). 66 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Input Mode (Input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit. Manual Setup > Option > Input Mode Choices: Auto, Last Multi Zone Surr.Initialize Input Mode Auto Memory Guard Last System Memory This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save settings such as the following: • Sound field program parameters • Speaker settings • Speaker channel settings • LFE level • Dynamic range settings • Parametric equalizer settings ■ To save settings • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected source. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 2 Press TOP on the remote control. Note 3 Select System Memory, then press h. 4 Select Save, then press ENTER. Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD. SUR button. ■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard Choices: Free, Guard Current Memory 1 The Bottom Line A:ON B:OFF Speaker SpeakerCH 3/4/0.1 LFE Level 0dB MAX D-Range Reset PEQ Memory 2 Surr.Initialize Input Mode Current displays the current settings of this unit. Free Guard Select “Guard” to protect: • DSP program parameters • All GUI menu items except Memory Guard and System Memory – Load 5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number under which you want to save the settings, then press h. “Save:ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 6 Press ENTER to save the settings. ADVANCED OPERATION Memory Guard y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Note In general, front panel and remote control operations are not affected by “Guard” functions. However, you cannot adjust the tone control using TONE CONTROL. English 67 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ To recall settings 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select System Memory, then press h. The Bottom Line A:ON B:OFF Speaker SpeakerCH 3/4/0.1 LFE Level 0dB MAX D-Range Reset PEQ Current Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 4 Select Load, then press ENTER. 5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number you want to recall, then press h. “Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 6 Press ENTER to recall the settings. y Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control. When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1? Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2? Yes: Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 9 68 0 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Display window SELECT PRESET AMP/SOURCE/ TV Set to AMP to operate this unit. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE EXIT TOP TITLE PURE DIRECT MENU The buttons inside the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, INPUT MODE, the input selector buttons, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, PURE DIRECT and STRAIGHT/ EFFECT). A/B buttons and the input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...Tape deck POWER TV AV STANDBY A B TUNER INPUT MODE V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD RETURN AMP + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOL – – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE DISPLAY TV INPUT MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 A SPEAKERS B +10 LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU ENTER LEVEL TOP ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY RE–NAME AUDIO SET MENU EXIT MENU MENU STRAIGHT STEREO HALL 1 2 Component control area You can control up to 14 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 80). JAZZ NIGHT NIGHT RETURN RETURN TV THTR MUSIC 5 6 THX SURROUND 9 0 4 11 +10 ON SCREEN DISPLAY DISPLAY MOVIE 7 STEREO STEREO AUDIO AUDIO ROCK 3 TEST 8 HALL MUSIC JAZZ ENTERTAIN SUR. BACK 22 FREQ/RDS EON 55 99 OFF 66 MODE PTY SEEK START 1 MEMORY 2 THX SURROUND REC DISC SKIP ON MACRO ROCK MOVIE 33 44 SELECT TV THTR EXTD. SUR MOVIE 77 88 ENT. THX ENTERTAIN STANDARD MUSIC 00 CHP/INDEX FREQ/RDS EON FREQ/RDS EON LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME A SPEAKERS SUR.BBACK +10 +10 ENT. ENT. MODE PTY PTYSEEK SEEK START START MODE AMP/ SOURCE/ TV Set to SOURCE to operate the component selected with an input selector button. Set to TV to operate the television (you must set the remote control code in DTV or PHONO). ADVANCED OPERATION CLEAR – TVNIGHT INPUT TV INPUT EFFECT ENTER ENTER MODE PTY SEEK START LEARN CH CH PURE DIRECT TITLE TITLE TEST ENTERTAIN MACRO – TVMUTE MUTE TV Display window REC ON + AA//BB//CC//DD//EE ENT. DISC SKIP TV PRESET PRESET + MUTE TVVOL VOL TV EFFECT STEREO OFF MULTI AV CH IN SELECT – EON POWER TVCD PRESET STRAIGHT FREQ/RDS SLEEP POWER AUDIO ENTER 0 POWER PHONO + NIGHT 9 SELECT k / n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. SYSTEM POWER REC REC DISCSKIP SKIP DISC CHP/INDEX English 69 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area) OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. Remote Control Code Default Settings Notes • You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 72 to program buttons operated within this component control area. • The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is selected in the amplifier library (see page 71). * Input area Library (Component category) Default YAMAHA code* A LD 2200 B TAPE 2700, (2701) PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER 2600, (0203, 1203, 1358, 2601) CD CD 2300, (2301) MULTI CH INPUT DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502) CD-R CD-R 2400 DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807 DVD DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses. Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 70 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. AMP library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control ID (this unit’s setting: see page 84) 2000 To operate this unit using the (initial setting) default code. LEARN 2001 To operate this unit using the default code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 81). (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. 2003 To operate this unit using an alternative code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features of other YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers (see page 81). y If you want to setup for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner), L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite), L:VCR ID1 (initial setting) ID2 When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 4 * The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “2000” in order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary. Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note “0000” appears in the display window if no code has been set. 5 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ADVANCED OPERATION Press the numeric buttons to enter the fourdigit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. English 71 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 6 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 8 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 69). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Note This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control.) 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the remote control code is correct. AMP SOURCE TV TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START 2 REC DISC SKIP DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Press an input selector button to select a source component. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DVD y If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes 3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. MULTI CH IN SLEEP SYSTEM AV CD INPUT MODE TRANSMIT B DVD CD-R POWER TV TUNER MD/TAPE STANDBY A DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 72 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B AV TUNER CD-R POWER A MD/TAPE TV PHONO CBL/SAT POWER V-AUX SELECT TV AMP SOURCE DVD + DVR/VCR2 – VOL VCR 1 + PURE DIRECT AUDIO NIGHT STRAIGHT DTV – CH PRESET – MUTE EXIT MENU DISPLAY + TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E ENTER TV VOL TOP TV MUTE TITLE RETURN 6 • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B DVD CD-R AV TUNER MD/TAPE POWER A DVR/VCR2 TV PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV SELECT V-AUX ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. “NG” appears in the display window if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. y English • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5 and 6. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 6. 73 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Changing source names in the display window 5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. ENTER 6 AMP SOURCE TV Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. y 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD If you continuously want to rename another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming mode. RE-NAME Note 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press RE-NAME again. 4 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. (Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.) ENTER 74 “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 76). Press a macro button CD To automatically transmit these signals in order SYSTEM POWER CD Macro buttons First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY — — (CD area) SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER POWER — — — — — — — — A B PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN — V-AUX V-AUX — CBL/SAT — CBL/SAT — (*3) — (CD area) (*2) SYSTEM POWER MD/TAPE MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE area) (*2) (*1) CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 ADVANCED OPERATION CD-R (CD-R area) (*2) — (VCR 1 area) (*2) (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*2) DVD (DVD area) (*2) *1 75 English You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.) *2 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see page 72) or set a remote control code (see page 70). *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Macro operations ■ Programming macro operations Macro buttons TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME You can program your own macros and use the macro feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. Notes MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a macro button. MACRO • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. Notes • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 76 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and setup remote control codes. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B PHONO TUNER V-AUX DTV STANDBY 2 POWER MCR 2: AV POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SOURCE TV 2 MCR 1: DVD 1 FREQ/RDS EON Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. MODE PTY SEEK START CLEAR REC 3 DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR MCR 3: h RE–NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 3 Indicates the number of macro steps entered L:DVD (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. L:ALL Clears all learned functions. M:ALL Clears all programmed macros RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Flashes alternately so you can set the next step Note 5 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. 4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display window. ADVANCED OPERATION To change the selected source component, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected component and corresponding component control area. Press k / n to select the clear mode. CLEAR Note “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). Note “L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. English Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code(s) and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. y 77 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode. CLEAR Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Clearing individual functions ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 78 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function 4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. FREQ/RDS EON You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE MODE PTY SEEK START TV REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. y MACRO • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. 6 Press LEARN again to exit. Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the macro programming mode. 5 Press MACRO again to exit. ADVANCED OPERATION y Notes 79 English • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 7 8 SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE 9 TV TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU 6 DVD PRESET 3 TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON 0 A SELECT EXTD. SUR 7 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. B MODE PTY SEEK START REC A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 4 TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU DISC SKIP PURE DIRECT 5 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B *1 *2 *3 *4 DISPLAY DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Cable TV/ TV Satellite tuner LD player CD player MD recorder/ CD recorder Tape deck Tuner AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 Power *1 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV VOL + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV VOL – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 CH + TV channel + *2 Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 PRESET + CH – TV channel – *2 Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 PRESET – TV INPUT/ A/B/C/D/E TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Direction A/B A/B/C/D/E *2 *2 *2 Mute *2 *2 *2 TV MUTE TV mute TITLE Title MENU Menu Menu Menu ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select k Menu up Menu up Menu up n Menu down Menu down Menu down l Menu left Menu left Menu left h Menu right Menu right Menu right RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward EON *4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 VCR rec *3 s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play Display Display h Play AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display ENTER TV mute Title TV mute Title TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 Title Preset stations (1-8) Search backward FREQ *4 Skip backward Direction back PTY MODE *4 Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward PTY START *4 Disc skip Rec Rec Skip backward Audio Enter Display Display Enter/recall Enter/ numeric button Display This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only. 80 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. • A video monitor for the second room. y OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT This unit • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ■ System configuration and connections example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 66). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT ADVANCED OPERATION SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 2 ZONE 3 Infrared emitter Main room Second room REMOTE OUT REMOTE 1 IN Third room REMOTE 2 IN • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 81 English Notes ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 66). R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second/third room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. 6 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. 7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3. ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– to control the selected room. 1 LEARN ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window. Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 SELECT MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 70. 3 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”. ENTER 4 Press ENTER. “2000” appears in the display window. 5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”. For details, see page 71. 82 or 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby individually. • When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or “2002” (see page 71) is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/standby simultaneously. LCD display Normal mode* Name of component Note Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. 4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– buttons. POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP SELECT AMP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV * A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT * VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu (see page 66). 5 “Zone2” or “2:name of component” Turns Zone 2 to on/ standby Zone 3 mode “Zone3” or “3:name of component” Turns Zone 3 to on/ standby Turns everything (the main unit, Zone 2, Zone 3) on/standby “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. ■ Special considerations for DTS software SYSTEM POWER Turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode System mode “SYSTM” * SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Notes • The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed For DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/ Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. ADVANCED OPERATION Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/ Zone 3 mode. The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. English 83 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. Advanced setup menu This menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the settings to reflect the needs of your listening environment. 1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode. 2 On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. STRAIGHT ■ SP IMP. (Speaker impedance) Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN • Select “6ΩMIN” for speakers that are 6 ohm or higher. • Select “8ΩMIN” for speakers that are 8 ohm or higher. ■ PRESET (Factory preset) Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial factory settings with the exception of System Memory and Auto Setup settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this unit’s parameters. • Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters. STANDBY /ON ■ REMOTE (Remote control ID) EFFECT 3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired operation. The name of the selected operation appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition (see page 71). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2000” or “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2002” or “2003”. ■ FAN MODE (Fan operation mode) 4 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the setting. 5 Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting This unit enters the standby mode. y The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of this unit. 84 Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan. Choices: AUTO, CONT • Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically according to the temperature of this unit. • Select “CONT” to set the fan to operate continuously regardless of the temperature of this unit. ■ TU (Tuner frequency step) (Asia and General models only) Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS Front panel display system options menu This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access most GUI menu system option parameters without using a video monitor. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then press ENTER to enter the selected item. 4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. 5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 6 Press DISPLAY to exit. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER 3-5 STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 2, 6 y If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return to the previously selected menu item. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to enter the menu. ■ AUTO SETUP Item Sub-items Features SETUP AUTO RELOAD • Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup adjusts. • Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu (see page 27). EQ NATURAL FLAT FRONT • Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup uses. • Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI menu (see page 28). START [ENTER] ADVANCED OPERATION • Use to activate the auto setup procedure. • Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 28). English 85 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ■ MANUAL SETUP 1 BASIC MENU Item Sub-items Features A)SPEAKER SET FRONT;;;;SMALL CENTER;;;;;SML SURR.LR;;;;SML SURR.B;;;SMLx2 PRESENCE;;NONE BASS OUT;;SWFR SWFR C/O;;80Hz SWFR PHASE;NRM • Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. • Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu (see page 61). B)SP DISTANCE UNIT;;;;meters FRONT L;;;3.0m FRONT R;;;3.0m CENTER;;;;3.0m SURR L;;;;3.0m SURR R;;;;3.0m SB L;;;;;;2.1m SB R;;;;;;2.1m SWFR;;;;;;3.0m PRES L;;;;3.0m PRES R;;;;3.0m FRONT L;;;10.0 FRONT R;;;10.0 CENTER;;;;10.0 SURR L;;;;10.0 SURR R;;;;10.0 SB L;;;;;;;7.0 SB R;;;;;;;7.0 SWFR;;;;;;10.0 PRES L;;;;10.0 PRES R;;;;10.0 • Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu (see page 64). C)SP LEVEL FR-----||----C-----||----FL-----||----SL-----||----SBL-----||----SBR-----||----SR-----||----SWFR-----||----PR.R-----||----PR.L-----||----- • Adjusts the output level of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu (see page 64). D)TEST TONE TEST TONE;;OFF • Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels. • Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu (see page 61). 86 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 2 SOUND MENU Item Sub-items Features A)LFE LEVEL SP LFE;;;;;;;0 HP LFE;;;;;;;0 • Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu (see page 58). B)D.RANGE SP D.R;;;;;MAX HP D.R;;;;;MAX • Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu (see page 58). C)TONE CON FRQ BASS FRQ.350Hz TRBL FRQ.xxkHz • Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. • Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu (see page 59). D)AUDIO OPTION A.MUTE;;;;MUTE A.DELAY;;;;;;0 PRch >SBch • Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. • Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu (see page 60). 3 INPUT MENU Item Sub-items Features A)I/O ASSIGN C.V[A] DVD C.V[B] DTV C.V[C]CBL/SAT OUT(1)MD/TAPE OUT(2) CD-R IN (3) CD IN (4) DVD IN (5) DTV IN (6)CBL/SAT IN (7) CD IN (8) DVD IN (9)DVR/VCR2 B)INPUT TRIM PHONO;;;;;;;0 • Adjusts the output volume of each jack. • Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu (see page 56). C)INPUT MODE >AUTO • Selects the initial input mode of the source. • Corresponds to Input Mode in the GUI menu (see page 67). D)INPUT RENAME DVD ._DVD • Changes the name of the input. • Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu (see page 57). E)MULTI CH IN >6CH 8CH DVD ->FRNT • Selects the number of audio channels input through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. • Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu (see page 57). ADVANCED OPERATION LAST • Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. • Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu (see page 56). English 87 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 4 OPTION MENU Item Sub-items Features A)DISPLAY SET DIMMER;;;;;;;0 WALL PAPER;;ON SHORT MSG. ON V CONV.;;;;;ON • Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. • Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu (see page 65). B)MEMORY GUARD MEM.GUARD;;OFF • Locks the menu parameter settings. • Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu (see page 67). C)SURR.INI PRESS DSP Key Cinema DSP • Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. • Corresponds to Surr.Initialize in the GUI menu (see page 66). D)ZONE SET SP B;;;;;;MAIN • Customizes the Zone B parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 66). E)ZONE2 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP;;EXT • Customizes the Zone 2 parameters (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only). • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 66). F)ZONE3 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. • Customizes the Zone 3 parameters (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only). • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 66). 88 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. The following parameters are not always found in every program. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. STEREO 4 MUSIC Munich ENTERTAINMENT Vienna MOVIE THEATER Freiburg Select the desired sound field program, then press h to access and adjust. Munich DSP Level Vienna Init. Delay Freiburg Room Size Note Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. To reset all parameters Use Surr.Initialize (see page 66). 89 English ■ Resetting parameters to the factory values ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67). SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP Level (DSP level) Function: Description: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control Range: –6 dB – +3 dB ■ Init. Delay (Initial delay) Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control Range: 1 – 99 ms Source Sound Time Initial delay Level Level Level Early Reflections Initial delay Time Initial delay Time Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ Room Size (Room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 90 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Liveness (Liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control Range: 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 ms ■ Sur.Room Size (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 ms ■ SB Room Size (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB Liveness (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 English 91 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Rev.Time (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 s Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation time Sound Source 60 dB Reverberation time Reverberation time Short Reverberation Long Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ Rev.Delay (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 ms Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Reverberation delay Reverberation time ■ Rev.Level (Reverberation level) Level Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Source Sound Reverberation level Time 92 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 0. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ Center Level (Center level) ■ Surround L Level (Surround left level) ■ Surround R Level (Surround right level) ■ Sur. Back Level (Surround back level) ■ Presence L Level (Presence left level) ■ Presence R Level (Presence right level) For PLIIx Music and PLII Music ■ Panorama Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. Off/On, initial setting is Off. ■ Dimension Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ Center Width Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control Range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For Neo:6 Music ■ Center Image Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. Control Range: 0.0 – 1.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 93 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Decode Type (Decoder type) For MOVIE THEATER Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs. Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6 For THX Cinema Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6 For SURROUND Standard Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard. Pro Logic / PLII Movie / PLII Music / PLII Game / PLIIx Movie / PLIIx Music / PLIIx Game / Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music For SURROUND Enhanced Function: Choices: 94 Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced. Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 25 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 17–22 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. — The input mode is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO”. 39 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 32 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 32 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 34 The input mode is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 39 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 65 13–16 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause English 95 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 25 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 34 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 17 Incorrect balance settings in the GUI menu. Adjust the Speaker Level settings. 64 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. 38 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 33 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 64 Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 61 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 33 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 64 Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 A monaural or stereo source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select. 60 Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to “None”, surround back speakers are automatically set to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 Surround Back is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or “Large x2”. 62 Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select “SWFR” or “Both”. 63 Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Select “Both”. 63 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy The source does not contain low bass signals. 96 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy Refer to page The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 39 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 21 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 21 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A “humming” sound can be heard. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 17–21 17–21 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. Select “Free”. 67 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radiofrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or radio-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — English The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. 97 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 98 Cause Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 40 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 40 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 41 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 40 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly. 70 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. 70 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 72 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 72 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 77 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 99 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. It provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels. An additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with a previously unheard of excitement and realism. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “flyaround” effects. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx ■ Neo:6 ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or 7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. 100 Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. GLOSSARY ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sound field programs ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 101 GLOSSARY Audio information ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering studios. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Adaptive decorrelation In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. Re-equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. Timbre matching The human ear changes our perception of sound depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The timbre matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. 102 GLOSSARY ■ THX Select Before any home theatre component can be THX Select certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ THX Surround EX THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 103 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 104 Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 130 W • Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Australia, China, Asia, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................180 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General models] 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................190 W • Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02% CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04% AM SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................................... 81 dB [Other models] ....................................................................... 86 dB CD (250 mV) to Front L/R .................................................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................ 3.5 kHz • Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model]..................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... 0.2 W [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ................................. 0.33 W [Other models] .................................................................. 0.15 W • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models].................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”) • Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W English 105
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107

Yamaha RX-V2500 de handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding